WO2003083048A2 - Novel secreted proteins and their uses - Google Patents

Novel secreted proteins and their uses Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003083048A2
WO2003083048A2 PCT/US2003/006714 US0306714W WO03083048A2 WO 2003083048 A2 WO2003083048 A2 WO 2003083048A2 US 0306714 W US0306714 W US 0306714W WO 03083048 A2 WO03083048 A2 WO 03083048A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
polypeptide
amino acid
cells
antibody
sequence
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2003/006714
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2003083048A3 (en
Inventor
Rueben Kirobi Njau
Douglas Raymond Perkins
Ho Yeong Song
Eric Wen Su
Yu Zhi
Margret Barbara Basinski
Original Assignee
Eli Lilly And Company
Scott, William, L.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Eli Lilly And Company, Scott, William, L. filed Critical Eli Lilly And Company
Priority to EP03745524A priority Critical patent/EP1492558A4/en
Priority to AU2003216525A priority patent/AU2003216525A1/en
Publication of WO2003083048A2 publication Critical patent/WO2003083048A2/en
Publication of WO2003083048A3 publication Critical patent/WO2003083048A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the identification and isolation of novel DNA, therapeutic and drug discovery uses, and the recombinant production of novel secreted polypeptides, designated herein as LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, and LP401.
  • the present invention also relates to vectors, host cells, and antibodies directed to these polypeptides. IL-l ⁇ BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Extracellular proteins play an important role in the formation, differentiation and maintenance of multi-cellular organisms.
  • the fate of many individual cells e.g., proliferation, migration, differentiation, or interaction with other cells, is typically governed by information received from other cells and/or the immediate environment. This information is often transmitted by secreted polypeptides (for instance, mitogenic factors, survival factors, cytotoxic factors, differentiation factors, neuropeptides, and hormones) which are, in turn, received and interpreted by diverse cell receptors or membrane-bound proteins.
  • secreted polypeptides for instance, mitogenic factors, survival factors, cytotoxic factors, differentiation factors, neuropeptides, and hormones
  • secreted polypeptides or signaling molecules normally pass through the cellular secretory pathway to reach their site of action in the extracellular environment.
  • Secreted proteins have various industrial applications, including pharmaceuticals, diagnostics, biosensors and bioreactors. Most protein drugs available at present such as thrombolytic agents, interferons, interleukins, erythropoietins, colony stimulating factors, and various other cytokines are secretory proteins. Their receptors, which are membrane proteins, also have potential as therapeutic or diagnostic agents.
  • novel proteins and the polynucleotides that encode them satisfies a need in the art by providing new compositions that are useful in the diagnosis, prevention, and/or treatment of medical diseases, disorders, and/or conditions, and in the assessment of the effects of exogenous compounds on the expression of nucleic acid and amino acid sequences of proteins.
  • the present invention describes the cloning and characterization of novel proteins, termed LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, and LP401 as well as active variants and/or fragments thereof.
  • the present invention provides isolated LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, and LP401 polypeptide encoding nucleic acids and the polypeptides encoded thereby, including fragments and/or specified variants thereof.
  • Contemplated by the present invention are LP probes, primers, recombinant vectors, host cells, transgenic animals, chimeric antibodies and constructs, LP polypeptide antibodies, as well as methods of making and using them diagnostically and therapeutically as described and enabled herein.
  • the present invention includes isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising polynucleotides that encode LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, and LP401 polypeptides as defined herein, as well as fragments and/or specified variants thereof, or isolated nucleic acid molecules that are complementary to polynucleotides that encode such LP polypeptides, or fragments and/or specified variants thereof as defined herein.
  • a polypeptide of the present invention includes an isolated LP polypeptide comprising at least one fragment, domain, or specified variant of at least 90-100% of the contiguous amino acids of at least one portion of SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
  • the present invention also provides an isolated LP polypeptide as described herein, wherein the polypeptide further comprises at least one specified substitution, insertion, or deletion corresponding to portions or specific residues of SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
  • the present invention also provides an isolated nucleic acid probe, primer, or fragment, as described herein, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a polynucleotide of at least 10 nucleotides, corresponding or complementary to at least 10 nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3, 5, 7, or 9.
  • compositions including pharmaceutical compositions, comprising an LP polypeptide, an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, an LP polynucleotide, and/or an LP polypeptide antibody, wherein the composition has a measurable effect on an activity associated with a particular LP polypeptide as disclosed herein.
  • a method of treatment or prophylaxis based on an LP polypeptide associated activity as disclosed herein can be effected by administration of one or more of the polypeptides, nucleic acids, antibodies, vectors, host cells, transgenic cells, and/or compositions described herein to a mammal in need of such treatment or prophylactic.
  • the present invention also includes methods for the prophylaxis or treatment of a patho-physiological condition in which at least one cell type involved in said condition is sensitive or responsive to an LP polypeptide, LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, LP nucleic acid, LP polypeptide antibody, host cell, transgenic cell, and/or composition of the present invention.
  • the present invention also provides an article of manufacture comprising a container, holding a composition effective for treating a condition disclosed herein, and a label.
  • the present invention also provides a method for identifying compounds that bind an LP polypeptide, comprising: a) admixing at least one isolated LP polypeptide as described herein with a test compound or composition; and b) detecting at least one binding interaction between the polypeptide and the compound or composition, optionally further comprising detecting a change in biological activity, such as a reduction or increase.
  • Applicants have identified cDNA clones comprising polynucleotides that encode novel polypeptides or novel variants of known polypeptides: 1) LP359 and LP364
  • LP359 polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:l are contemplated as one embodiment of the present invention.
  • polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof.
  • LP359 polynucleotides encoding the LP359 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP359 is a secreted protein possessing a signal peptide in the N terminal 31 amino acids of the full-length protein.
  • the mature protein is approximately 206 amino acids in length (from about amino acid 32 to amino acid 237 of SEQ ID NO:2).
  • LP364 polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:3 are contemplated as another embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:4, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP364 polynucleotides encoding the LP364 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention. Sequence analysis of LP364 indicates that it is a secreted protein possessing a signal peptide in the first 15 amino acids of the full-length protein. The mature protein is approximately 318 amino acids in length (from about amino acid 16 to amino acid 333 of SED ID NO:4).
  • LP359 SEQ ID NO: 2
  • LP364 SEQ ID NO:4
  • proteins are generally characterized as comprising collagenous helical structures at their amino portions and a globular domain at their carboxy portions [see, e.g., Prockop and Kivirikko, Ann. Rev. Biochem 64:403-434 (1995)].
  • Examples of members of this family include: the Clq A, B, and C chains of the complement Clq complex; collagen alpha 1(X); lung surfacant proteins SP-A and SP-D; mannan binding protein; hibernation proteins HP-20, HP-25, and HP-27; AdipoQ/AC P30; and cerebellins.
  • the sequence characteristics of LP359 and LP364 suggest that these polypeptides are members of this protein family.
  • Clq is a subunit of the CI enzyme complex that activates the serum complement system.
  • Clq is composed of nine disulfide-linked dimers of A, B, and C chains that share two structural regions that are well-conserved among the Clq family of proteins.
  • One region is a collagen-like region in the amino portion of the protein.
  • the other region is an aromatic zipper or globular portion (the Clq globular domain) and is located in the carboxy portion of the protein.
  • the collagen-like amino portion of the proteins in the Clq family consist of multiple copies (typically of 10-30) of repeated Gly-Xaa-Yaa motifs.
  • the second (Xaa) and third (Yaa) positions can be any residue but are frequently proline and hydroxyproline [Mayne and Brewton, Curr Opin Cell Biol 5:883-890 (1993)].
  • Characteristically, such Gly-Xaa-Yaa repeats are predicted to form collagen-like triple helices via multimerization with other proteins, thereby yielding protein structures typically comprised of hetero- or homotrimeric subunits.
  • collagenlike domains containing Gly-Xaa-Yaa repeats in the Cl q A, B, and C polypeptides form heterotrimeric, helical collagen-like structures that are held together by both covalent and non-covalent bonds.
  • LP359 and LP364 each share sequence similarity to the Clq family collagen-like amino region.
  • this region is from about amino acid 34 to about amino acid 87 of SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the collagen-like amino region consists of three domains containing Gly-Xaa-Yaa motifs, where the domains are from about amino acid 27 to about amino acid 202 of SEQ ID NO:4.
  • the similarity of these regions of LP359 and LP364 to the collagen-like amino regions of Clq family proteins suggest that LP359 and LP364 each may form collagen-like multimers.
  • the Clq-like globular domain is found in the C-terminal ends of secreted (or membrane-bound) vertebrate proteins, which, typically, are short-chain collagens and/or collagen-like molecules [Smith, et al. Biochem. J. 301 :249-256 (1994); Brass, et al. 1992 FEBS Lett. 303:126-128 (1992); Perry, et al. ur. J. Biochem. 209:129-134 (1992)].
  • the globular domain consists of about 136 amino acids that form ten beta strands interspersed by beta-turns and/or loops (Smith, et al. 1994 Biochem. J. 301 :249- 256).
  • LP359 and LP364 each exhibit a Clq globular domain.
  • this domain is from about amino acid 97 to about amino acid 221 of SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the CI q globular domain is from about amino acid 203 to about amino acid 329 of SEQ ID NO:4.
  • Clq is part of the classical pathway of the complement component of the immune system. Clq interacts with aggregated IgGs via its globular domains and initiates complement cascade by proteolytically activating factors C2 and C4.
  • an LP359 or LP364 as described herein is also likely to participate in complement-mediated processes or in complement-related diseases, conditions, and/or syndromes.
  • a crystal structure of the Clq signature domain of a member of the Clq protein family, ACRP30 has been determined [Shapiro and Scherer, Curr. Bio. 8:335-338 (1998)].
  • the three-dimensional structure of ACRP30 is superimposable onto the three- dimensional structure of tumor necrosis factor proteins (TNFs) as they display similar ten-strand jelly-roll fold topology [Shapiro and Scherer, Current Biology 8:335-338 (1997)]. This topology similarity occurs in spite of these sequences having overall low sequence similarity, as TNF-alpha has few amino acid residues that would be classified as characteristic of a Clq signature domain.
  • TNFs tumor necrosis factor proteins
  • the amino acid sequences of LP359 and LP364 indicate that these polypeptides possess structural topology similar to that of the superimposable higher-order structural topology shared between TNFs and ACRP30.
  • the four key amino acid residues conserved between TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, CD40L, ACRP30 appear to be present in LP359 and LP364.
  • these corresponding residues are found at amino acid Gly 139, Tyrl41 , Phe216, and Leu221 of SEQ ID NO:2.
  • LP364 these corresponding conserved residues are found at amino acid Gly247, Tyr249, Phe324, and Leu329 of SEQ ID NO:4.
  • LP359 and LP364 are also members of the Clq/TNF superfamily and possesses a similar folding topology with ten beta-strand jelly-roll features. Consequently, it is also likely that secreted LP359 or LP364 (or portions thereof), or a LP359 or LP364 complex interacts with a membrane receptor to activate an intracellular signal transduction cascade in a manner analogous to TNF alpha.
  • TNF alpha is produced in response to infection and plays a variety of roles, such as for example, in: inflammation, cell proliferation, cell death, immunity, and energy homeostasis, where it is implicated in cachexia, obesity, and insulin resistance [Hotamisligil and Spiegelman, Diabetes 43:1271-1278 (1994); Uysal, et al, Nature 389:610-614 (1997)].
  • TNF alpha also regulates the expression levels of some downstream components of the complement system.
  • TNF alpha is also a major secretory product of adipocytes. Similar activities have been observed for Clq family proteins such as ACRP30 and Hib27.
  • LP359 and LP364 may be members of the Complement Clq/Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF) family with similar functionalities due to the possession of a similarly conserved higher-order structural topology.
  • TNF Complement Clq/Tumor Necrosis Factor
  • LP359 is expressed in heart.
  • the expression of LP359 in heart indicates that it may be associated with cardiovascular disease, and therefore prove beneficial as a therapeutic or therapeutic target.
  • LP359 amino acid sequence and putative structural features to known Clq family proteins it is likely that LP359, an LP359 variant, an LP359 agonist, an LP359 antagonist, an LP359 binding partner, or an LP359 fragment plays a role in physiological processes involved with complement activation and/or modulation of various diseases, condition or syndromes associated with complement activation. Modulation of LP359 may therefore prove beneficial in treating several diseases and conditions, including but not limited to, cardiovascular disease, obesity, diabetes, high blood pressure, and inflammation.
  • the LP364 polypeptide is highly expressed in prostate, as determined by northern blot analysis with human tissue RNA blots. LP364 may therefore be useful for treatment of prostate cancer or as an inhibition target for prostate cancer.
  • the relationship of LP364 amino acid sequence to CI q family protein structures indicates that LP364, an LP364 variant, and LP364 agonist, an LP364 antagonist, an LP364 binding partner or an LP364 fragment may be involved with numerous physiological processes associated with modulation of complement activation and/or modulation of various diseases and conditions associated with complement activation. LP364 therefore may have a role in prostate cancer through the modulation of various processes including, but not limited to, tumorgenesis, cellular metastatis, cell proliferation, and cell homeostasis.
  • LP364 may be a therapeutic or therapeutic target in other complement associated diseases, including but not limited to, obesity, diabetes, osteoarthritis, vascular, and/or neurodegenerative diseases.
  • polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:5 are contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP381 polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:6, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof.
  • LP381 polynucleotides encoding LP381 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP381 is expressed in human lymph node tissue, based on identification of the DNA encoding LP381 polypeptide from a clone obtained by PCR amplification of human lymph node cDNA (Clontech, Palo Alto, CA). Sequence analysis of the LP381 polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO:6 indicates that it is a shortened splice-variant of interleukin 2 (IL-2), which has been cloned from a human cDNA library [Taniguchi et al., Nature 302:305-10 (1983)]. In eukaryotic cells, IL-2 is synthesized as a precursor polypeptide of 153 amino acids, from which 20 amino acids are removed to generate mature secreted IL-2.
  • IL-2 interleukin 2
  • LP381 like IL-2, has a signal peptide of 20 amino acids.
  • the mature LP381 is therefore approximately 113 amino acids in length (from about amino acid 21 to amino acid 133 of SEQ ID NO:6).
  • the mRNA processing of LP381 produces an mRNA that lacks the second exon of IL-2 mRNA, which correspondingly yields an LP381 polypeptide that contains a 20 amino acid deletion in comparison to the native IL-2 polypeptide.
  • the amino acids missing in this deletion correspond to amino acids 50-69 of mature IL-2 polypeptide, in which the amino acids remaining after removal of the signal peptide are numbered 1-133.
  • cysteine residues at positions 58 and 105 of mature IL-2 polypeptide (corresponding to amino acids 58 and 105 of LP381 as shown in SEQ ID NO:6) suggested by Ciardelli et al. to be necessary for full biological activity are present [Ciardelli et al., in Immune Regulation by Characterized Polypeptides, Goldstein, Bach, Wigzell, Eds. (Liss, New York, 1987), pp. 315-322].
  • IL-2 is a soluble protein and is produced from T cells activated with a lectin or an antigen [Morgan et al., Science 193:1007-1008 (1976), Gillis et al., J. Immunol., 120:2027-2033 (1978)].
  • IL-2 is capable of modulating lymphocyte reactivity and promoting the in vitro long-term culture of antigen specific effector T-lymphocytes [Gillis et al., Nature 268: 154-156 (1977)].
  • IL-2 is also known to manifest other relevant biological activities such as enhancement of thymocyte mitogenesis [Chen et al., Cell. Immunol. 22:21 1-224 (1977), Shaw et al., J. Immunol.
  • IL-2 has also been shown to modulate various other immune functions, including exerting effects on cytotoxic T cells [Gillis et al, J Immunol. 124:1954-62 (1980)], natural killer cells [Ortaldo et al., J. Immunol. 133:779-83 (1984], activated B cells [Mingari et al, Nature 312:641-3 (1984)] and lymphokine activated killer (LAK) cells [Grimm et al, J Exp Med. 155:1823-41 (1982); Mazumder and Rosenberg, J Exp Med. 159:495-507 (1984)].
  • this lymphocyte regulatory substance is useful in potentiating humoral and cellular immune responses and in restoring immune deficient state to a normal humoral and cellular immune state.
  • IL-2 is useful for medical immunotherapy against immunological disorders including neoplastic diseases, bacterial or viral infections, immune deficient diseases, autoimmune diseases, and conditions related thereto.
  • This naturally occurring lymphokine has been shown to have antitumor activity against a variety of malignancies either alone or when combined with leukotriene-activated killer (LAK) cells or tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes [see, for example, Rosenberg et al, N. Engl. J Med. 319: 1676-1680 (1988) and Weber et al, J. Clin. Oncol. 10:33-40 (1992)].
  • LAK leukotriene-activated killer
  • IL-2 anti-tumor activity has been well described in patients with metastatic melanoma and renal cell carcinoma [see, for example, MacFarlane et al, Cancer 75:1030-7 (1995)].
  • Other indications for treatment with IL-2 include, but are not limited to, leukemia [Goodman et al, Leukemia 12:1682-4 (1998)], melanoma [Chang and Rosenberg, J. Immunother. 24:88-90 (2000)], non-Hodgkin lymphoma [van Besien et al, Cancer J. Sci. Am.
  • IL-2 While the administration of IL-2 has proven to be beneficial in cancer therapy, the clinical usefulness of IL-2 immunotherapy is currently limited due to problems of marked toxicity. LP381 may prove beneficial as an IL-2 variant which has reduced toxicity towards human cells, thereby leading to the development of more effective methods of clinical immunotherapy.
  • Sequence encoding LP381 has been localized to human chromosome region 4q26-q27. Moreover, the following diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states have also been mapped to this region of the human genome: severe combined immunodeficiency due to a specific defect in the production of interleukin-2 [Weinberg and Parkman, N. Engl J. Med. 322:1718-23 (1990)], fibrodysplasia ossificans progressiva [Feldmen et al, Am. J. Hum. Genet. 66:128-135 (2000)], long QT syndrome- 4 with sinus bradycardia [Schott et al, Am. J Hum. Genet.
  • an isolated and/or recombinant molecule comprising LP381 nucleic acid sequence can be used, for example, to hybridize near a nucleic acid sequence associated with one or more of the above stated diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states and thus serve as a marker for such a disease gene.
  • polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:7 are contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP400 polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:8, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof.
  • LP400 polynucleotides encoding LP400 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP400 is expressed in leukocytes, based on cloning of DNA encoding LP400 polypeptide from a leukocyte cDNA library.
  • the LP400 polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO:7 is a shortened splice-variant of interleukin-1 beta (IL-l ⁇ ).
  • IL-l ⁇ interleukin-1 beta
  • alternative splicing produces an mRNA that lacks exons 1 and 5 of IL-l ⁇ mRNA, where exon 1 resides in the 5 '-untranslated region of the IL-l ⁇ mRNA.
  • LP400 mRNA is truncated compared to exon 7 of IL-1 ⁇ mRNA, to yield a shortened (from the 3' end) 3 '-untranslated region in LP400 mRNA compared to that of IL-1 ⁇ mRNA.
  • the LP400 mRNA correspondingly yields an LP400 polypeptide that contains a 56 amino acid deletion in comparison to the native IL-l ⁇ polypeptide, such that LP400 polypeptide does not contain amino acids 100-155 of IL-l ⁇ precursor polypeptide.
  • Human IL-l ⁇ is synthesized as a 269 amino acid long precursor polypeptide (proIL-l ⁇ ), and is cleaved into a 116 amino acid pro-segment and a 153 amino acid mature segment [Thornberry et al, Nature 356:768 (1992)].
  • IL-l ⁇ -converting enzyme ICE
  • IL-l ⁇ -converting enzyme ICE
  • mature IL-l ⁇ is secreted and proIL-l ⁇ accumulates mostly inside the cell, but proIL-l ⁇ is also found outside the cell [Thornberry et al, Nature 356:768 (1992)].
  • IL-1 ⁇ is part of the IL-1 cellular signaling pathway that plays a crucial role in the mammalian inflammatory response and is associated with a wide range of immunologic, metabolic, physiological and hematopoietic activities.
  • the IL-1 family includes three structurally related cytokines: IL-1 alpha, IL-l ⁇ and IL-1 receptor antagonist [Dinarello, Blood 87:2095 (1996)].
  • IL-1 ⁇ is a proinflammatory agonist that binds with high affinity to both the type I and type II IL-1 receptors, with the known biological functions of IL-l ⁇ being mediated through the type I IL-1 receptor.
  • the type II IL-1R has a severely truncated cytoplasmic domain and upon binding to IL-1 does not transduce signal to a cell, but instead is involved in regulating an IL-1 -mediated response by acting as a decoy receptor [Colotta et al, Immunol. Today 15:562 (1994)].
  • IL-l ⁇ is released by macrophages and certain other cell types in response to infections, microbial toxins, inflammatory agents, allergic reactions and similar stimuli which initiate host response to injury and infection.
  • IL-l ⁇ largely functions to regulate the amplitude and duration of the immune and inflammatory response at the sites of inflammation or allergic immune reaction.
  • excess IL-l ⁇ is produced or IL-l ⁇ expression is not appropriately regulated disease states can develop.
  • IL-l ⁇ has been implicated in a variety of inflammatory and immunoregulatory diseases and conditions, such as rheumatoid arthritis and lupus [Martel-Pelletier et al, Front. Biosci. 4:D694-703 (1999)].
  • IL-l ⁇ has also been implicated in wound healing [Garg et al, Biochem Mol Biol Int. 31 :583-91 (1993)].
  • IL-l ⁇ has been associated with bone formation and remodeling [Kusano et al, Endocrinol 139:1338 (1998)], insulin secretion [Ling et al, Endocrinol. 139:1540 (1998)], appetite regulation [Plata-Salaman, Physiol Behav. 55:727 (1994)], fever induction [Hansen et al, J. Neurosci. 18:2247 (1998)], neuronal phenotype development [Ling et al, Exp.
  • LP400 polypeptide may be useful as a therapeutic or therapeutic target in the treatment of medical disorders associated with IL-l ⁇ , including, but not limited to those mentioned above, such as IL-l ⁇ mediated inflammatory reactions and IL-1 ⁇ mediated immunoregulatory reactions.
  • LP400 polypeptide may prove useful as an adjuvant, in which LP400 would provide enhancement or modulation of the response of a subject's immune system to an antigen.
  • IL-1 and other cytokines may be useful as adjuvants with vaccines to protect against infectious diseases [Lin et al, Clin. Infect. Diseases 21 :1439 (1995)].
  • Sequence encoding LP400 has been localized to human chromosome region 2ql4. Moreover, the following diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states have also been mapped to this region of the human genome: colorectal cancer with chromosomal instability [Cahill et al, Nature 392: 300-303 (1998); Cahill et al, Genomics 58:181-187 (1999)], distal hereditary motor neuronopathy Nil [McEntagart et al, Am. J Hum. Genet. 68:1270-1276 (2001)], autosomal dominant dilated cardiomyopathy [Jung et al., Am. J. Hum. Genet.
  • an isolated and/or recombinant molecule comprising LP400 nucleic acid sequence can be used, for example, to hybridize near a nucleic acid sequence associated with one or more of the above stated diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states and thus serve as a marker for such a disease gene.
  • polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID ⁇ O:9 are contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP401 polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO: 10, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP401 polynucleotides encoding LP401 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
  • LP401 is expressed in leukocyte tissue, based on identification of the DNA encoding LP401 polypeptide from a clone obtained by PCR amplification of a leukocyte cDNA library.
  • the LP401 polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO: 10 is a shortened splice- variant of interleukin-10 (IL-10).
  • IL-10 interleukin-10
  • alternative splicing produces an mRNA that lacks exon 3 of IL-10 mRNA.
  • the LP401 mRNA correspondingly yields an LP401 polypeptide that is 127 amino acids in length.
  • the LP401 polypeptide thereby contains a 51 amino acid deletion in comparison to the native IL-10 polypeptide, which is produced as a 178 amino acid polypeptide.
  • the LP401 polypeptide therefore contains two nonapeptide domains (amino acids 26-34 and 119- 127 of SEQ ID NO : 10) that have been suggested to be responsible for particular IL-10 biological functions, including cytokine synthesis inhibitory properties and regulation of mast cell proliferation [Gesser et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 14620-14625 (1997)].
  • the 178 amino acid IL-10 polypeptide includes an 18 amino acid signal peptide, which is cleaved to yield a mature IL- 10 polypeptide of 160 amino acids.
  • LP401 polypeptide is also predicted to be a secreted protein, wherein the first 18 amino acids of the nascent polypeptide are a signal peptide.
  • the mature LP401 protein is correspondingly approximately 109 amino acids in length, from about amino acid 19 to amino acid 127 of SEQ ID NO: 10.
  • IL-10 is a multifunctional cytokine that modulates a variety of functions of hemopoietic cells. IL-10 was initially recognized for its ability to inhibit activation and effector function of T cells, monocytes, and macrophages [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol 19:683-765 (2001)].
  • IL-10 The primary role of IL-10 is apparently in the regulation of inflammation, as IL-10 serves to both limit and eventually terminate inflammatory responses. IL-10 also plays a role in the regulation of growth and/or differentiation of a number of cell types, including B cells, NK cells, cytotoxic and helper T cells, mast cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, keratinocytes, endothelial cells, and T regulatory cells.
  • Human IL-10 has closely related homologs in several organisms, such as mouse [Moore et al, Science 248:1230-1234 (1990)], rat [Goodman et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 189:1-7 (1992)], and several species of monkey [Moore et al, Ann. Rev.
  • IL-10 homologs such as that found encoded by Epstein-Barr virus which has 84% amino acid identity to the human IL-10 [Moore et al, Science 248:1230-1234 (1990)].
  • the expression of viral homologs of IL-10 is consistent with its primary role in regulating immune and inflammatory responses.
  • IL-10 is expressed by a variety of cells, including T cells, monocytes and macrophages in response to various activation stimuli [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)]. IL-10 exerts it effects in large part through modulating the expression of various effector molecules by cells of myeloid origin. For example, IL-10 inhibits the production of a number of cytokines by monocytes and macrophages, including IL-1 alpha, IL-1 beta, IL-6, IL-10, IL-12, IL-18, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, TNF, LIP and PAF [de Waal et al, J. Exp. Med.
  • CC type chemokines MCP1 , MCP-5, Mip-1 alpha, Mip-1 beta, Mip-3 alpha, Mip-3 beta, Rantes, MDC
  • CXC type chemokines IL-8, IP- 10, MIP-2, KC
  • IL-10 Kopydlowski et al, J. Immunol. 163:1537-44 (1999); Rossi et al, J. Immunol. 158:1033-36 (1997)].
  • IL- 10 therefore inhibits the production of several cytokines, chemokines and related molecules that are involved in inflammation.
  • IL-10 has been indicated to be useful in treating inflammation associated with various conditions, including those giving rise to systemic or local inflammation, infectious diseases, autoimmune diseases, allergic responses, intestinal immune regulation, cancer, and graft reception.
  • IL-10 administration has been shown be protective against experimental endotoxemia in animal studies with mice and baboons as well as in studies with humans [Gerard et al, J. Exp. Med. 177:547-50 (193); van der Poll et al, J. Immunol. 158:1971-75 (1997); Pajkrt et al, J. Immunol. 158:3971-77 (1997)].
  • IL-10 has also shown efficacy in treating animal models of burn and ischemia reperfusion [Engles et al, J. Surg. Res. 69:425-28 (1997); Lyons et al, Arch. Surg. 134:1317-24 (1999)]. Furthermore, IL-10 has been shown to have protective effects in many models of local inflammation, including pancreatis, uveitis, keratitis, hepatitis, peritonitis, lung injury, and brain or spinal cord injury [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)].
  • IL-10 The anti-inflammatory effects of IL-10 have been suggested to be protective against autoimmunity.
  • administration of IL-10 has been shown to reduce joint swelling, cytokine production, and cartilage degradation in models of rheumatoid arthritis [van Roon et al, Arthritis Rheum. 39:495-503 (1996); Joosten et al, Arthritis Rheum. 40:249-60 (1997)].
  • inhibition of IL-10 may be protective in certain conditions of autoimmunity.
  • IL-10 stimulation of immunoglobulin production by B cells has been suggested to contribute to the pathogenesis of system lupus erythematosis (SLE), as supported by reduction of SLE symptoms after administration of anti-IL-10 monoclonal antibody [Llorente et al, Arthritis Rheum. 43:1790-18000 (2000)].
  • Inflammation mediated by Th2 cells that infiltrate airways is critical in the pathology of many allergic diseases, such as asthma.
  • a role for IL-10 in allergic inflammation has been indicated by relatively low levels of IL-10 found in the lungs of asthmatic patients compared to the levels of IL-10 found in the lungs of nonasthmatic patients [John et al, Am. J. Respir. Crit. Care Med. 157:256-62 (1998)]. Higher levels of IL-10 may therefore contribute to limiting pathology inducing Th2 responses.
  • IL-10 may therefore be beneficial in treating intestinal immune responses, such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis.
  • IL-10 has also been suggested to be beneficial in treating certain forms of cancer.
  • administration of IL-10 or IL-10 expression by gene transfer into tumor cells inhibited establishment and growth of tumors [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)].
  • IL-10 pretreatment of mice that received heart allografts enhanced graft survival [Li et al, Transplant. Proc. 31 :1 15 (1999)].
  • IL-10 pretreatment of mice that received heart allografts enhanced graft survival [Li et al, Transplant. Proc. 31 :1 15 (1999)].
  • patients having increased production levels of IL-10 prior to transplantation have been observed to have lower incidence of graft versus host disease and improved survival [Holler et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 25:237-41 (2000)].
  • Administration of IL-10 prior to organ or bone marrow transplantation is therefore useful in providing tolerance to transplantation.
  • IL-10 plays a critical role in the response of the immune system to infectious diseases, which entails balancing the elimination of infection and minimizing nonspecific injury to host tissue.
  • the role of IL-10 in regulating the effects of cytokines and other effector molecules is central to this immune system balancing of pathology and protection. Inhibition of IL-10 enables cytokines and effector molecules to act toward eliminating infection, while production of IL-10 is effective in inhibiting these molecules and preventing inflammatory damage to host tissue.
  • IL-10 may serve as either a therapeutic target or therapeutic agent for many infectious diseases.
  • IL-10 levels have decreased in conjunction with treatment of the infection by drug therapy [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)].
  • IL-10 may inhibit protective immunity. This concept is further supported by in vitro restoration of responses of pathogen-specific T cells from infected patients upon treatment with anti-IL- 10 monoclonal antibodies.
  • IL-10 can be effective in treatment of infectious diseases.
  • Administration of IL-10 to patients with chronic hepatitis C infection has been shown to reverse liver fibrosis without increasing viral titers [Nelson et al, Gastroenterology 118:655-60 (2000)].
  • infection with H. hepaticus renders the mice susceptible to enterocolitis, and infection with B. burgdorferi causes more severe Lyme arthritis than occurs in control, wild-type mice [Kullberg et al, Infect. Immun. 66:5157-66 (1998); Brown et al, Infect. Immun. 67:5142- 50 (1999)].
  • both IL-10 and IL-10 inhibitors may prove beneficial in the treatment of infectious diseases, depending on the consequences of a given infectious disease.
  • the similarity of LP401 to IL-10, including two regions suggested to be important for IL-10 function, indicates that LP401 may prove useful as a therapeutic or therapeutic target.
  • LP401 may function in a manner similar to IL-10, such that it administration of LP401 could be useful in treating diseases and conditions that involve inflammation.
  • these diseases and conditions include, but are not limited to, those giving rise to systemic or local inflammation, infectious diseases, autoimmune diseases, allergic responses, intestinal immune regulation, cancer, and graft reception.
  • LP401 might have properties that are antagonistic to IL-10.
  • LP401 would prove beneficial in diseases or conditions that benefit from a reduction in IL-10 activity.
  • diseases are noted herein, and include but are not limited to several infectious diseases, such as leishmaniasis, malaria, filariasis, leprosy, tuberculosis, candidiasis, M. avium infection, and schistosomiasis.
  • Sequence encoding LP401 has been localized to human chromosome region
  • an isolated and/or recombinant molecule comprising LP401 nucleic acid sequence can be used, for example, to hybridize near a nucleic acid sequence associated with one or more of the above stated diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states and thus serve as a marker for such a disease gene.
  • the polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention are designated herein as "LP polynucleotides” or "LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotides” and "LP polypeptides.”
  • LP polypeptides When immediately followed by a numerical designation (i.e., LP359), the term "LP" refers to a specific group of molecules as defined herein.
  • LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotides
  • LP polynucleotides or LP polynucleotides
  • LP polypeptides wherein the term “LP” is followed by an actual numerical designation as used herein encompass novel polynucleotides and polypeptides, respectively, which are further defined herein.
  • the LP molecules described herein may be isolated from a variety of sources including, but not limited to human tissue types, or prepared by recombinant or synthetic methods.
  • the isolated nucleic acid comprises 1) a polynucleotide encoding an LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, or LP401 polypeptide having an amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10, respectively; 2) a polynucleotide complementary to such encoding nucleic acid sequences, and which remain stably bound to them under at least moderate, and optionally, high stringency conditions; or 3) any fragment and/or variant of 1) or 2).
  • LP polypeptide specifically encompasses truncated or secreted forms of an LP polypeptide, (e.g., soluble forms containing, for instance, an extracellular domain sequence), variant forms (e.g., alternatively spliced forms) and allelic variants of an LP polypeptide.
  • the native sequence LP polypeptide is a full- length or mature LP polypeptide comprising amino acids as shown in SEQ ID NO: 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
  • the LP polypeptides disclosed herein are shown to begin with a methionine residue designated as amino acid position 1 it is conceivable and possible that another methionine residue located either upstream or downstream from amino acid position 1 may be employed as the starting amino acid residue.
  • a "portion" of an LP polypeptide sequence is at least about 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,
  • LP polypeptide variant is intended to refer to an "active" LP polypeptide, wherein activity is as defined herein, having at least about 90% amino acid sequence identity with an LP polypeptide having a deduced amino acid sequences as shown above.
  • Such LP polypeptide variants include, for instance, LP polypeptides, wherein one or more amino acid residues are added, substituted or deleted, at the N- or C-terminus or within the sequences shown.
  • an LP polypeptide variant will have at least about 90% amino acid sequence identity, preferably at least about 91% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 92% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 93% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 94% sequence identity, - yet more preferably at least about 95% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 96% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 97% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 98% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 99% amino acid sequence identity with the amino acid sequence described, with or without the signal peptide.
  • similar or “similarity” as used herein describes the relationship between different nucleic acid compounds or amino acid sequences in which said sequences or molecules are related by partial sequence identity or sequence similarity at one or more blocks or regions within said molecules or sequences.
  • similar or “similarity” describes amino acid residues which are either identical between different amino acid sequences, or represent conservative amino acid substitutions between different sequences.
  • amino acid residues which are identical between different amino acid sequences.
  • Amino acid sequence similarity or identity with respect to each LP amino acid sequence identified herein is defined as the percentage of amino acid residues in a candidate sequence that are similar or identical with the amino acid residues in an LP polypeptide sequence, after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence similarity or identity.
  • Percent (%) amino acid sequence identity with respect to the LP amino acid sequences identified herein is defined as the percentage of amino acid residues in a candidate sequence that are identical with the amino acid residues in an LP polypeptide sequence, after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity, and not considering any conservative substitutions as part of the sequence identity. Alignment for purposes of determining percent amino acid sequence identity can be achieved in various ways that are within the skill in the art, for instance, using publicly available computer software such as ALIGN, ALIGN-2, Megalign (DNASTAR) or BLAST (e.g., Blast, Blast-2, WU-Blast-2) software.
  • a percent amino acid sequence identity value is determined by dividing (a) the number of matching identical amino acid residues between the amino acid sequence of the LP polypeptide of interest and the comparison amino acid sequence of interest (i.e., the sequence against which the LP polypeptide of interest is being compared) as determined by WU-BLAST-2, by (b) the total number of amino acid residues of the LP polypeptide of interest, respectively.
  • LP variant polynucleotide “LP polynucleotide variant,” or “LP variant nucleic acid sequence” are intended to refer to an nucleic acid molecule as defined below having at least about 75% nucleic acid sequence identity with the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3, 5, 7, or 9.
  • an LP polynucleotide variant will have at least about 75% nucleic acid sequence identity, more preferably at least about 80% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 81% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 82% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 83% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 84% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 85% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 86% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 87% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 88% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 89% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 90% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 91% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 92% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 93% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably
  • Variants specifically exclude or do not encompass the native nucleotide sequence, as well as those prior art sequences that share 100% identity with the nucleotide sequences of the invention.
  • Percent (%) nucleic acid sequence identity with respect to the LP polynucleotide sequences identified herein is defined as the percentage of nucleotides in a candidate sequence that are identical with the nucleotides in the LP polynucleotide sequence after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity.
  • Alignment for purposes of determining percent nucleic acid sequence identity can be achieved in various ways that are within the skill in the art, for instance, using publicly available computer software such as ALIGN, Align-2, Megalign (DNASTAR), or BLAST (e.g., Blast, Blast-2) software. Those skilled in the art can determine appropriate parameters for measuring alignment, including any algorithms needed to achieve maximal alignment over the full length of the sequences being compared. For purposes herein, however, % nucleic acid identity values are generated using the WU-BLAST-2 (BlastN module) program [Altschul, et al, Methods in Enzymology 266:460-80 (1996)]. Most of the WU-BLAST-2 search parameters are set to the default values.
  • a percent nucleic acid sequence identity value is determined by dividing (a) the number of matching identical nucleotides between the nucleic acid sequence of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of interest and the comparison nucleic acid molecule of interest (i.e., the sequence against which the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of interest is being compared) as determined by WU-BLAST-2, by (b) the total number of nucleotides of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of interest.
  • the BLAST algorithm In addition to calculating percent sequence identity, the BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul, 1993, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787).
  • One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance.
  • P(N) the smallest sum probability
  • a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.1, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.
  • the LP variant polypeptides are encoded by nucleic acid molecules which are capable of hybridizing, preferably under stringent hybridization and wash conditions, to nucleotide sequences encoding the full-length LP polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
  • This scope of variant polynucleotides specifically excludes those sequences that are known as of the filing and/or priority dates of the present application.
  • the term "homolog" refers to a molecule from a given organism that exhibits sequence similarity and/or identity and has substantially similar biological activity as a molecule from a different organism.
  • mouse polypeptide that functions in the mouse in a manner equivalent to which human LP341 functions in humans may be referred to as a mouse homolog of LP341.
  • the term “homolog” is also intended to encompass two or more genes or proteins from different organisms or within a single organism that exhibit sequence similarity and/or identity.
  • the term “homolog” as used herein includes allelic variants, as well as splice variants from an LP polynucleotide sequence.
  • family as used herein when referring to the polypeptide and nucleic acid molecules of the invention is intended to designate two or more proteins or nucleic acid molecules having a common structural domain or motif and having sufficient amino acid or nucleotide sequence identity and/or similarity as defined herein.
  • family members can be naturally or non-naturally occurring and can be from either the same or different species.
  • a family can contain a first protein of human origin as well as other distinct proteins of human origin, or alternatively, can contain homologs of non-human origin, such as rat or mouse proteins.
  • Members of a family can also have common functional characteristics.
  • mature protein or "mature polypeptide” as used herein refers to the form(s) of the protein produced by expression in a mammalian cell. It is generally hypothesized that once export of a growing protein chain across the rough endoplasmic reticulum has been initiated, proteins secreted by mammalian cells have a signal peptide (SP) sequence which is cleaved from the complete polypeptide to produce a "mature" form of the protein. Oftentimes, cleavage of a secreted protein is not uniform and may result in more than one species of mature protein.
  • SP signal peptide
  • the cleavage site of a secreted protein is determined by the primary amino acid sequence of the complete protein.
  • Methods for predicting whether a protein has an SP sequence, as well as the cleavage point for that sequence are known in the art.
  • programs for predicting signal sequences are exemplified by SPScan, SigCleave and SignalP [Menne et al, Bioinformatics 16:741-2 (2000)] using information from residues surrounding the cleavage site, typically residues -13 to +2 (where +1 indicates the amino terminus of a secreted protein), or from deduced amino acid sequences of secreted polypeptides.
  • cleavage sites can vary from organism to organism and even from molecule to molecule within a cell and cannot be predicted with absolute certainty. Accordingly, the natural positions of the signal cleavage peptide sites and the N-terminal amino acids for the mature LP polypeptides of the present invention may vary from those described herein for LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, or LP401, such that the natural amino terminal of the mature polypeptides may contain as many as 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 additional or fewer amino acids.
  • cleavage sites for a secreted protein are determined experimentally by amino-terminal sequencing of the one or more species of mature proteins found within a purified preparation of the protein.
  • the percent identity value of positives is determined by the fraction of residues scoring a positive value in the BLOSUM 62 matrix. This value is determined by dividing (a) the number of amino acid residues scoring a positive value in the BLOSUM62 matrix of WU-BLAST-2 between the LP polypeptide amino acid sequence of interest and the comparison amino acid sequence (i.e., the amino acid sequence against which the LP polypeptide sequence is being compared) as determined by WU-BLAST-2, by (b) the total number of amino acid residues of the LP polypeptide of interest.
  • isolated when used to describe the various polypeptides disclosed herein, means a polypeptide that has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Preferably, the isolated polypeptide is free of association with all components with which it is naturally associated. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials that would typically interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the polypeptide, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes.
  • the polypeptide will be purified (1) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N- terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, or (2) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing or reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or, preferably, silver stain.
  • Isolated polypeptide includes polypeptide in situ within recombinant cells, since at least one component of the LP polypeptide natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated polypeptide will be prepared by at least one purification step.
  • isolated LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid or "isolated LP nucleic acid” is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated from at least one contaminant nucleic acid molecule with which it is ordinarily associated in the natural source of the nucleic acid. Such an isolated nucleic acid molecule is other than in the form or setting in which it is found in nature. Isolated nucleic acid molecules therefore are distinguished from the nucleic acid molecule as it exists in natural cells.
  • an isolated LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule includes LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecules contained in cells that ordinarily express LP polypeptide where, for example, the nucleic acid molecule is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells.
  • Nucleic acid is "operably linked" when it is placed into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence.
  • DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide;
  • a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or
  • a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation.
  • "operably linked” means that the DNA sequences being linked are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader, contiguous and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such sites do not exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide adapters or linkers are used in accordance with conventional practice.
  • amino acid is used herein in its broadest sense, and includes naturally occurring amino acids as well as non-naturally occurring amino acids, including amino acid analogs and derivatives. The latter includes molecules containing an amino acid moiety.
  • reference herein to an amino acid includes, for example, naturally occurring proteogenic L-amino acids; D-amino acids; chemically modified amino acids such as amino acid analogs and derivatives; naturally-occurring non-proteogenic amino acids such as norleucine, beta-alanine, ornithine, etc.; and chemically synthesized compounds having properties known in the art to be characteristic of amino acids.
  • proteogenic indicates that the amino acid can be incorporated into a peptide, polypeptide, or protein in a cell through a metabolic pathway.
  • D-LP polypeptides The incorporation of non-natural amino acids, including synthetic non-native amino acids, substituted amino acids, or one or more D-amino acids into the LP peptides, polypeptides, or proteins of the present invention.
  • D-amino acid-containing peptides, polypeptides, or proteins exhibit increased stability in vitro or in vivo compared to L-amino acid- containing counterparts.
  • the construction of peptides, polypeptides, or proteins incorporating D-amino acids can be particularly useful when greater intracellular stability is desired or required.
  • D-peptides, polypeptides, or proteins are resistant to endogenous peptidases and proteases, thereby providing improved bioavailability of the molecule and prolonged lifetimes in vivo when such properties are desirable.
  • the use of L-amino acids therein will permit endogenous peptidases, proteases, etc., in a cell to digest the molecule in vivo, thereby limiting the cell's exposure to the molecule.
  • D-peptides, polypeptides, or proteins cannot be processed efficiently for major histocompatibility complex class II- restricted presentation to T helper cells, and are therefore less likely to induce humoral immune responses in the whole organism.
  • Alterations in the LP peptides, polypeptides, or proteins of the present invention can include one or more amino acid insertions, deletions, substitutions, truncations, fusions, shuffling of subunit sequences, and the like, either from natural mutations or human manipulation, provided that the sequences produced by such modifications have substantially the same (or improved or reduced, as may be desirable) activity(ies) as the naturally-occurring counterpart sequences disclosed herein.
  • hydropathic index of amino acids One factor that can be considered in making such changes is the hydropathic index of amino acids.
  • the importance of the hydropathic amino acid index in conferring interactive biological function on a protein has been discussed by Kyte and Doolittle [J Mol. Biol. 157:105-32 (1982)]. It is accepted that the relative hydropathic character of amino acids contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein. This, in turn, affects the interaction of the protein with molecules such as enzymes, substrates, receptors, ligands, DNA, antibodies, antigens, etc.
  • each amino acid has been assigned a hydropathic index as follows: isoleucine (+4.5); valine (+4.2); leucine (+3.8); phenylalanine (+2.8); cysteine/cystine (+2.5); methionine (+1.9); alanine (+1.8); glycine (-0.4); threonine (-0.7); serine (-0.8); tryptophan (-0.9); tyrosine (-1.3); proline (-1.6); histidine (-3.2); glutamate/glutamine/aspartate/asparagine (-3.5); lysine (-3.9); and arginine (-4.5).
  • amino acids in a peptide, polypeptide, or protein can be substituted for other amino acids having a similar hydropathic index or score and produce a resultant peptide, polypeptide, or protein having similar biological activity, i.e., which still retains biological functionality.
  • amino acids having hydropathic indices within ⁇ 2 are substituted for one another. More preferred substitutions are those wherein the amino acids have hydropathic indices within ⁇ 1. Most preferred substitutions are those wherein the amino acids have hydropathic indices within ⁇ 0.5.
  • hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acids: arginine/lysine (+3.0); aspartate/glutamate (+3.0 ⁇ 1); serine (+0.3); asparagine/glutamine (+0.2); glycine (0); threonine (-0.4); proline (-0.5 ⁇ 1); alanine/histidine (-0.5); cysteine (-1.0); methionine (-1.3); valine (-1.5); leucine/isoleucine (-1.8); tyrosine (-2.3); phenylalanine (-2.5); and tryptophan (-3.4).
  • one amino acid in a peptide, polypeptide, or protein can be substituted by another amino acid having a similar hydrophilicity score and still produce a resultant peptide, polypeptide, or protein having similar biological activity, i.e., still retaining correct biological function.
  • amino acids having hydropathic indices within ⁇ 2 are preferably substituted for one another, those within ⁇ 1 are more preferred, and those within ⁇ 0.5 are most preferred.
  • amino acid substitutions in the LP polypeptides of the present invention can be based on the relative similarity of the amino acid side-chain substituents, for. example, their hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, size, etc.
  • Exemplary substitutions that take various of the foregoing characteristics into consideration in order to produce conservative amino acid changes resulting in silent changes within the present peptides, polypeptides, or proteins can be selected from other members of the class to which the naturally occurring amino acid belongs.
  • Amino acids can be divided into the following four groups: (1) acidic amino acids; (2) basic amino acids; (3) neutral polar amino acids; and (4) neutral non-polar amino acids.
  • amino acids within these various groups include, but are not limited to: (1 ) acidic (negatively charged) amino acids such as aspartic acid and glutamic acid; (2) basic (positively charged) amino acids such as arginine, histidine, and lysine; (3) neutral polar amino acids such as glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, cystine, tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine; and (4) neutral non-polar amino acids such as alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine. It should be noted that changes which are not expected to be advantageous can also be useful if these result in the production of functional sequences.
  • the present invention includes peptides, polypeptides, or proteins such as those discussed herein, containing the amino acid modifications discussed above, alone or in various combinations. To the extent that such modifications can be made while substantially retaining the activity of the peptide, polypeptide, or protein, they are included within the scope of the present invention.
  • the utility of such modified peptides, polypeptides, or proteins can be determined without undue experimentation by, for example, the methods described herein.
  • While biologically functional equivalents of the present LP polypeptides can have any number of conservative or non-conservative amino acid changes that do not significantly affect their activity(ies), or that increase or decrease activity as desired, the number of changes preferred may be 40, 30, 20, 10, 5, 3 or fewer changes, or any range or value therein, such as 1 to 30 changes, in particular, ten or fewer amino acid changes may be preferred. More preferably, seven or fewer amino acid changes may be preferred; most preferably, five or fewer amino acid changes may be preferred.
  • the encoding nucleotide sequences will thus have corresponding base substitutions, permitting them to code expression for the biologically functional equivalent forms of the LP polypeptides.
  • the LP peptides, polypeptides, or proteins exhibit the same or similar biological or immunological activity(ies) as that(those) of the LP polypeptides specifically disclosed herein, or increased or reduced activity, if desired.
  • the activity(ies) of the variant LP polypeptides can be determined by the methods described herein.
  • Variant LP polypeptides biologically functionally equivalent to those specifically disclosed herein have activity(ies) differing from those of the presently disclosed molecules by about ⁇ 50% or less, preferably by about ⁇ 40% or less, more preferably by about ⁇ 30% or less, more preferably by about ⁇ 20% or less, and even more preferably by about ⁇ 10% or less, when assayed by the methods disclosed herein.
  • Amino acids in an LP polypeptide of the present invention that are essential for activity can be identified by methods known in the art, such as site-directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis [Cunningham and Wells, Science 244:1081-5 (1989)].
  • “Stringency” of hybridization reactions is readily determinable by one of ordinary skill in the art, and generally is an empirical calculation dependent upon probe length, washing temperature, and salt concentration. In general, longer nucleic acid probes required higher temperatures for proper annealing, while shorter nucleic acid probes need lower temperatures. Hybridization generally depends on the ability of denatured DNA to reanneal when complementary strands are present in an environment below their melting temperature. The higher the degree of desired complementarity between the probe and hybridizable sequence, the higher the relative temperature that can be used. As a result, it follows that higher relative temperatures would tend to make the reactions more stringent, while lower temperatures less so. For additional details and explanation of stringency of hybridization reactions, see Ausubel, et al, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Wiley Interscience Publishers (1995).
  • “Stringent conditions” or “high stringency conditions,” as defined herein, may be identified by those that (1) employ low ionic strength and high temperature for washing, for example, 15 mM sodium chloride/1.5 mM sodium citrate/0.1% sodium dodecyl sulfate at 50 degrees C; (2) employ during hybridization a denaturing agent, such as formamide, for example, 50% (v/v) formamide with 0.1% bovine serum albumin/0.1% f ⁇ coll/0.1% polyvinylpyrrolidone/50 mM sodium phosphate buffer at pH 6.5 with 750 mM sodium chloride/75 mM sodium citrate at 42 degrees C; or (3) employ 50% formamide, 5X SSC (750 mM sodium chloride, 75 mM sodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate (pH 6.8), 0.1% sodium pyrophosphate, 5X Denhardt's solution, sonicated salmon sperm DNA (50 ⁇ g/mL), 0.1% SDS, and 10% dextran
  • Modely stringent conditions may be identified as described by Sambrook, et al. [Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, New York: Cold Spring Harbor Press, (1989)], and include the use of washing solution and hybridization conditions (e.g., temperature, ionic strength and %SDS) less stringent than those described above.
  • moderately stringent conditions is overnight incubation at 37 degrees C in a solution comprising: 20% formamide, 5X SSC (750 mM sodium chloride, 75 mM sodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate at pH 7.6, 5X Denhardt's solution, 10% dextran sulfate, and 20 mg/mL denatured sheared salmon sperm DNA, followed by washing the filters in IX SSC at about 37 to 50 degrees C.
  • 5X SSC 750 mM sodium chloride, 75 mM sodium citrate
  • 50 mM sodium phosphate at pH 7.6, 5X Denhardt's solution, 10% dextran sulfate, and 20 mg/mL denatured sheared salmon sperm DNA
  • epitope tagged refers to a chimeric polypeptide comprising an LP polypeptide, or domain sequence thereof, fused to a "tag polypeptide.”
  • the tag polypeptide has enough residues to provide an epitope against which an antibody may be made, or which can be identified by some other agent, yet is short enough such that it does not interfere with the activity of the LP polypeptide.
  • the tag polypeptide preferably is also fairly unique so that the antibody does not substantially cross-react with other epitopes. Suitable tag polypeptides generally have at least six amino acid residues and usually between about eight to about fifty amino acid residues (preferably, between about ten to about twenty residues).
  • immunoadhesin designates antibody-like molecules that combine the binding specificity of a heterologous protein (an “adhesin”) with the effector functions of immunoglobulin constant domains.
  • the immunoadhesins comprise a fusion of an amino acid sequence with the desired binding specificity which is other than the antigen recognition and binding site of an antibody (i.e., is "heterologous"), and an immunoglobulin constant domain sequence.
  • the adhesin part of an immunoadhesin molecule typically is a contiguous amino acid sequence comprising at least the binding site of a receptor or a ligand.
  • the immunoglobulin constant domain sequence in the immunoadhesin may be obtained from any immunoglobulin, such as IgG-1, IgG-2, IgG-3 or IgG-4 subtypes, IgA (including IgA-1 and IgA-2), IgE, IgD or IgM.
  • immunoglobulin such as IgG-1, IgG-2, IgG-3 or IgG-4 subtypes, IgA (including IgA-1 and IgA-2), IgE, IgD or IgM.
  • Active or “activity” for the purposes herein refers to form(s) of LP polypeptide which retain all or a portion of the biologic and/or immunologic activities of native or naturally-occurring LP polypeptide.
  • biological activity refers to a biological function (either inhibitory or stimulatory) caused by a native or naturally- occurring LP polypeptide other than the ability to induce the production of an antibody against an antigenic epitope possessed by a native or naturally-occurring LP polypeptide.
  • An "immunological” activity refers only to the ability to induce the production of an antibody against an antigenic epitope possessed by a native or naturally-occurring LP polypeptide.
  • antagonist is used in the broadest sense and includes any molecule that partially or fully blocks, inhibits, or neutralizes a biological activity of a native LP polypeptide disclosed herein.
  • agonist is used in the broadest sense and includes any molecule that mimics a biological activity of a native LP polypeptide disclosed herein. Suitable agonist or antagonist molecules specifically include agonist or antagonist antibodies or antibody fragments, fragments or amino acid sequence variants of native LP polypeptides, peptides, ribozymes, anti-sense nucleic acids, small organic molecules, etc.
  • Methods for identifying agonists or antagonists of an LP polypeptide may comprise contacting an LP polypeptide with a candidate agonist or antagonist molecule and measuring a detectable change in one or more biological activities normally associated with the LP polypeptide.
  • Antibodies are glycoproteins having the same structural characteristics. While antibodies exhibit binding specificity to a specific antigen, immunoglobulins include both antibodies and other antibody-like molecules that lack antigen specificity. Polypeptides of the latter kind are, for example, produced at low levels by the lymph system and at increased levels by myelomas.
  • antibody is used in the broadest sense and specifically covers, without limitation, intact monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies) formed from at least two intact antibodies, and antibody fragments so long as they exhibit the desired biological activity.
  • treating refers to curative therapy, prophylactic therapy, and preventive therapy.
  • preventive therapy is the prevention or lessened targeted pathological condition or disorder. Those in need of treatment include those already with the disorder as well as those prone to have the disorder or those in whom the disorder is to be prevented.
  • Chronic administration refers to administration of the agent(s) in a continuous mode as opposed to an acute mode, so as to maintain the initial therapeutic effect (activity) for an extended period of time.
  • Intermittent administration is treatment that is not consecutively done without interruption but, rather, is cyclic in nature.
  • Administration "in combination with” one or more further therapeutic agents includes simultaneous (concurrent) and consecutive administration in any order.
  • a “therapeutically-effective amount” is the minimal amount of active agent (e.g., an LP polypeptide, antagonist or agonist thereof) which is necessary to impart therapeutic benefit to a mammal.
  • a "therapeutically-effective amount" to a mammal suffering or prone to suffering or to prevent it from suffering is such an amount which induces, ameliorates, or otherwise causes an improvement in the pathological symptoms, disease progression, physiological conditions associated with or resistance to succumbing to the aforedescribed disorder.
  • Carriers as used herein include pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers which are nontoxic to the cell or mammal being exposed thereto at the dosages and concentrations employed. Often the physiologically-acceptable carrier is an aqueous pH buffered solution.
  • physiologically acceptable carriers include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid; low molecule weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; salt-forming counterions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as TWEEN ® , polyethylene glycol (PEG), and PLURONIC ® .
  • buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids
  • antioxidants including ascorbic acid
  • low molecule weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides proteins, such as
  • Antibody fragments comprise a portion of an intact antibody, preferably the antigen binding or variable region of the intact antibody.
  • antibody fragments include Fab, Fab', F(ab') 2 and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies
  • Fv is the minimum antibody fragment which contains a complete antigen- recognition and binding site. This region consists of a dimer of one heavy- and one light- chain variable domain in tight, non-covalent association. It is in this configuration that the three CDRs of each variable domain interact to define an antigen-binding site on the surface of the V H V L dimer. Collectively, the six CDRs confer antigen-binding specificity to the antibody. However, even a single variable domain (or half of an Fv comprising only three CDR specific for an antigen) has the ability to recognize and bind antigen, although at a lower affinity than the entire binding site.
  • Single-chain Fv or “sFv” antibody fragments comprise the V H and V L domains of antibody, wherein these domains are present in a single polypeptide chain.
  • the Fv polypeptide further comprises a polypeptide linker between the V H and V domain, which enables the sFv to form the desired structure for antigen binding.
  • diabodies refers to small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, which fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (V H ) connected to a light- chain variable domain (V L ) in the same polypeptide chain (V H N L ).
  • V H heavy-chain variable domain
  • V L light- chain variable domain
  • V H N L polypeptide chain
  • an "isolated” antibody is one which has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials which would interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the antibody, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes.
  • the antibody will be purified (1) to greater than 95% by weight of antibody as determined by the Lowry method, and most preferably more than 99% by weight, (2) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of ⁇ -terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, or (3) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under reducing or nonreducing conditions using Coomassie blue, or preferably, silver stain.
  • Isolated antibody includes the antibody in situ within recombinant cells since at least one component of the antibody's natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.
  • LP polypeptide antibody refers to an antibody as defined herein that recognizes and binds at least one epitope of an LP polypeptide of the present invention.
  • LP polypeptide antibody or “LP antibody” wherein the term “LP” is followed by a numerical designation refers to an antibody that recognizes and binds to at least one epitope of that particular LP polypeptide as disclosed herein.
  • a “liposome” is a small vesicle composed of various types of lipids, phospholipids and/or surfactant which is useful for delivery of a drug (such as an LP polypeptide or antibody thereto) to a mammal.
  • the components of the liposome are commonly arranged in a bilayer formation, similar to the lipid arrangement of biological membranes.
  • a "small molecule” is defined herein to have a molecular weight below about 500 daltons.
  • modulate means to affect (e.g., either upregulate, downregulate or otherwise control) the level of a signaling pathway.
  • Cellular processes under the control of signal transduction include, but are not limited to, transcription of specific genes, normal cellular functions, such as metabolism, proliferation, differentiation, adhesion, apoptosis and survival, as well as abnormal processes, such as transformation, blocking of differentiation and metastasis.
  • An LP polynucleotide can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxyribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA.
  • the LP polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double- stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions.
  • LP polynucleotides can be composed of triple- stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA. LP polynucleotides may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons. "Modified" bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine. A variety of modifications can be made to DNA and RNA; thus, “polynucleotide” embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms.
  • LP polypeptides can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the gene-encoded amino acids.
  • the LP polypeptides may be modified by either natural processes, such as post-translational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the LP polypeptides, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini.
  • LP polypeptides may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic LP polypeptides may result from post-translation natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods.
  • Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination.
  • LP polypeptide described herein can be made, for example, using any of the techniques and guidelines for conservative and non-conservative mutations set forth, for instance, in U.S. Patent 5,364,934. Variations may be a substitution, deletion or insertion of one or more codons encoding LP polypeptide that results in a change in the amino acid sequence of the LP polypeptide as compared with the native sequence LP polypeptide or an LP polypeptide as disclosed herein. Optionally the variation is by substitution of at least one amino acid with any other amino acid in one or more of the domains of the LP polypeptide.
  • Guidance in determining which amino acid residue may be inserted, substituted or deleted without adversely affecting the desired activity may be found by comparing the sequence of the LP polypeptide with that of homologous known protein molecules and minimizing the number of amino acid sequence changes made in regions of high identity and/or similarity.
  • Amino acid substitutions can be the result of replacing one amino acid with another amino acid having similar structural and/or chemical properties, such as the replacement of a leucine with a serine, i.e., conservative amino acid replacements. Insertions or deletions may optionally be in the range of one to five amino acids.
  • the variation allowed may be determined by systematically making insertions, deletions or substitutions of amino acids in the sequence and testing the resulting variants for activity (such as in any of the in vitro assays described herein) for activity exhibited by the full-length or mature polypeptide sequence.
  • LP polypeptide fragments are also provided herein. Such fragments may be truncated at the N-terminus or C-terminus, or may lack internal residues, for example, when compared with a full length or native protein. Certain fragments contemplated by the present invention may lack amino acid residues that are not essential for a desired biological activity of the LP polypeptide.
  • LP polypeptide fragments may be prepared by any of a number of conventional techniques. Desired peptide fragments may be chemically synthesized.
  • An alternative approach involves generating LP fragments by enzymatic digestion, e.g., by treating the protein with an enzyme known to cleave proteins at sites defined by particular amino acid residues, or by digesting the DNA with suitable restriction enzymes and isolating the desired fragment.
  • Yet another suitable technique involves isolating and amplifying a DNA fragment encoding a desired polypeptide fragment by polymerase chain reaction (PCR). Oligonucleotides that define the desired termini of the DNA fragment are employed at the 5' and 3' primers in the PCR.
  • LP polypeptide fragments share at least one biological and/or immunological activity with at least one of the LP polypeptides as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
  • Covalent modifications of LP polypeptides are included within the scope of this invention.
  • One type of covalent modification includes reacting targeted amino acid residues of an LP polypeptide with an organic derivatizing agent that is capable of reacting with selected side chains or the N- or C-terminal residues of an LP polypeptide.
  • Derivatization with bifunctional agents is useful, for instance, for crosslinking LP polypeptide to a water-insoluble support matrix or surface for use in the method for purifying anti-LP polypeptide antibodies, and vice-versa.
  • crosslinking agents include, e.g., l ,l -bis(diazoacetyl)-2-phenylethane, glutaraldehyde, N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, for example, esters with 4-azidosalicylic acid, homobifunctional imidoesters, including disuccinimidyl esters such as 3,3'-dithiobis- (succinimidylproprionate), bifunctional maleimides such as bis-N-maleimido-l ,8-octane and agents such as methyl-3-[(p-azidophenyl)dithiolproprioimidate.
  • Another type of covalent modification of the LP polypeptides included within the scope of this invention comprises altering the native glycosylation pattern of the polypeptide.
  • "Altering the native glycosylation pattern" is intended for purposes herein to mean deleting one or more carbohydrate moieties found in native sequence LP polypeptide and/or adding one or more glycosylation sites that are not present in the native sequences of LP polypeptides. Additionally, the phrase includes qualitative changes in the glycosylation of the native proteins, involving a change in the nature and proportions of the various carbohydrate moieties present. Addition of glycosylation sites to LP polypeptides may be accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence thereof.
  • the alteration may be made, for example, by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the native sequences of LP polypeptides (for O-linked glycosylation sites).
  • the LP amino acid sequences may optionally be altered through changes at the DNA level, particularly by mutating the DNA encoding the LP polypeptides at preselected bases such that codons are generated that will translate into the desired amino acids.
  • Another means of increasing the number of carbohydrate moieties on the LP polypeptides is by chemical or enzymatic coupling of glycosides to the polypeptide. Such methods are described in the art, e.g., in WO 87/05330, and in Aplin and Wriston, CRC Crit. Rev. Biochem., pp. 259-306 (1981).
  • Removal of carbohydrate moieties present on the LP polypeptide may be accomplished chemically or enzymatically or by mutational substitution of codons encoding for amino acid residues that serve as targets for glycosylation.
  • Chemical deglycosylation techniques are known in the art and described, for instance, by Sojar, et al, Arch. Biochem. Biophys. 259:52-7 (1987), and by Edge, et al, Anal. Biochem. 118:131-7 (1981).
  • Enzymatic cleavage of carbohydrate moieties on polypeptides can be achieved by the use of a variety of endo- and exo-glycosidases as described by Thotakura, et al, Meth. Enzymol. 138:350-9 (1987).
  • Another type of covalent modification of LP comprises linking any one of the LP polypeptides to one of a variety of non-proteinaceous polymers (e.g., polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, or polyoxyalkylenes) in the manner set forth in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,640,835; 4,496,689; 4,301,144; 4,670,417; 4,791 ,192, or 4,179,337.
  • non-proteinaceous polymers e.g., polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, or polyoxyalkylenes
  • LP polypeptides of the present invention may also be modified in a way to form chimeric molecules comprising an LP polypeptide fused to another heterologous polypeptide or amino acid sequence.
  • a chimeric molecule comprises a fusion of an LP polypeptide with a tag polypeptide which provides an epitope to which an anti-tag antibody can selectively bind.
  • the epitope tag is generally placed at the amino- or carboxyl- terminus of LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, or LP401 polypeptide.
  • the presence of such epitome-tagged forms of an LP polypeptide can be detected using an antibody against the tag polypeptide.
  • provision of the epitome tag enables an LP polypeptide to be readily purified by affinity purification using an anti- tag antibody or another type of affinity matrix that binds to the epitome tag.
  • the chimeric molecule may comprise a fusion of an LP polypeptide with an immunoglobulin or a particular region of an immunoglobulin.
  • a fusion could be to the Fc region of an IgG molecule.
  • the Ig fusions preferably include the substitution of a soluble transmembrane domain deleted or inactivated form of an LP polypeptide in place of at least one variable region within an Ig molecule.
  • the immunoglobulin fusion includes the hinge, CH2 and CH3 or the hinge, CHI, CH2 and CH3 regions of an IgGl molecule.
  • the LP polypeptides of the present invention may also be modified in a way to form a chimeric molecule comprising an LP polypeptide fused to a leucine zipper.
  • leucine zipper polypeptides have been described in the art. See, e.g., Landschulz, et al, Science 240(4860): 1759-64 (1988); WO 94/10308; Hoppe, et al, FEBS Letters 344(2-3):191-5 (1994); Abel, et al, Nature 341(6237):24-5 (1989).
  • a leucine zipper fused to an LP polypeptide may be desirable to assist in dimerizing or trimerizing soluble LP polypeptide in solution.
  • the zipper may be fused at either the N- or C-terminal end of an LP polypeptide.
  • LP polypeptides by culturing cells transformed or transfected with a vector containing an LP polypeptide- encoding nucleic acid. It is, of course, contemplated that alternative methods, which are well known in the art, may be employed to prepare LP polypeptides.
  • the LP polypeptide sequence, or portions thereof may be produced by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques [see, e.g., Stewart, et al, Solid-Phase Peptide Synthesis, W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, CA (1969); Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149- 2154 (1963)].
  • In vitro protein synthesis may be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis may be accomplished, for instance, using an Applied Biosystems Peptide Synthesizer (Foster City, CA) using manufacturer's instructions. Various portions of an LP polypeptide may be chemically synthesized separately and combined using chemical or enzymatic methods to produce a full-length LP polypeptide. DNA encoding an LP polypeptide may be obtained from a cDNA library prepared from tissue believed to possess the LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA and to express it at a detectable level.
  • Probes such as antibodies to an LP polypeptide or oligonucleotides of at least about 20 to 80 bases
  • Screening the cDNA or genomic library with the selected probe may be conducted using standard procedures, such as described in Sambrook, et al, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, NY (1989).
  • An alternative means to isolate the gene encoding an LP polypeptide is to use PCR methodology [Sambrook, et al, supra; Dieffenbach, et al, PCR Primer: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, NY (1995)].
  • Nucleic acids having protein coding sequence may be obtained by screening selected cDNA or genomic libraries using the deduced amino acid sequence disclosed herein for the first time and, if necessary, using conventional primer extension procedures as described in Sambrook, et al, supra, to detect precursors and processing intermediates of mRNA that may not have been reverse-transcribed into cDNA.
  • Host cells are transfected or transformed with expression or cloning vectors described herein for LP polypeptide production and cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired sequences.
  • the culture conditions such as media, temperature, pH and the like, can be selected by the skilled artisan without undue experimentation. In general, principles, protocols, and practical techniques for maximizing the productivity of cell cultures can be found in Mammalian Cell Biotechnology: A Practical Approach, Butler, ed. (IRL Press, 1991) and Sambrook, et al, supra. Methods of fransfection are known to the ordinarily skilled artisan, for example, calcium phosphate and electroporation.
  • Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) in the vectors herein include prokaryote, yeast, or higher eukaryote cells.
  • Suitable prokaryotes include but are not limited to eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms, for example, Enterobacteriacea such as E. coli.
  • Various E. coli strains are publicly available, such as E. coli K12 strain MM294 (ATCC 31,446); E. coli strain X1776 (ATCC 31,537); E. coli strain W3110 (ATCC 27,325) and K5 772 (ATCC 53,635).
  • suitable prokaryotic host cells include Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia, e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Salmonella, e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, Serratia, e.g., Serratia marcescans, and Shigella, as well as Bacilli such as B. subtilis and B. licheniformis (e.g., B. licheniformis 41P disclosed in DD 266,710, published 12 April 1989), Pseudomonas such as P. aeruginosa, and Streptomyces. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting.
  • Strain W3110 is one particularly preferred host or parent host because it is a common host strain for recombinant DNA product fermentations. Preferably, the host cell secretes minimal amounts of proteolytic enzymes.
  • strain W3 110 may be modified to effect a genetic mutation in a gene encoding proteins endogenous to the host, with examples of such hosts including E. coli W31 10 strain 1A2, which has the complete genotype tonAD; E. coli W31 10 strain 9E4, which has the complete genotype tonAD ptr3; E.
  • E. coli W31 10 strain 27C7 (ATCC 55,244), which has the complete genotype tonAD ptr3 phoADE15 D(argF-lac)169 ompTD degP41kan R ;
  • E. coli W31 10 strain 37D6 which has the complete genotype tonAD ptr3 phoADE15 D(argF-lac)169 ompTD degP41kan R rbs7D ilvG;
  • E. coli W3110 strain 40B4 which is strain 37D6 with a non-kanamycin resistant degP deletion mutation; and an E. coli strain having mutant periplasmic protease as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,946,783 issued 7 August 1990.
  • eukaryotic microbes such as filamentous fungi or yeast are suitable cloning or expression hosts for LP vectors.
  • Saccharomyces cerevisiae is a commonly used lower eukaryotic host microorganism.
  • Others include Schizosaccharomyces pombe [Beach and Nurse, Nature 290:140-3 (1981); EP 139,383 published 2 May 1995]; Muyveromyces hosts [U.S.
  • Patent 4,943,529 Fleer, et al, Bio/Technology 9(10):968-75 (1991)] such as, e.g., K. lactis (MW98-8C, CBS683, CBS4574) [de Louvencourt, et al, J. Bacteriol 154(2):737-42 (1983)]; K. fiagilis (ATCC 12,424), K. bulgaricus (ATCC 16,045), K wickeramii (ATCC 24,178), K. waltii (ATCC 56,500), K. drosophilarum (ATCC 36.906) [Van den Berg, et al, Bio/Technology 8(2): 135-9 (1990)]; K. thermotolerans, and K.
  • Schwanniomyces such as Schwanniomyces occidentulis (EP 394,538 published 31 October 1990); and filamentous fungi such as, e.g., Neurospora, Penicillium, Tolypocladium (WO 91/00357 published 10 January 1991), and Aspergillus hosts such as A. nidulans [Ballance, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 112(l):284-9 (1983); Tilburn, et al, Gene 26(2-3):205-21 (1983); Yelton, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81(5):1470-4 (1984)] and A.
  • Methylotropic yeasts are selected from the genera consisting of Hansenula, Candida, Kloeckera, Pichia, Saccharomyces, Torulopsis, and Rhodotoruia. A list of specific species that are exemplary of this class of yeast may be found in Antony, The Biochemistry of Methylotrophs 269 (1982).
  • Suitable host cells for the expression of glycosylated LP polypeptides are derived from multicellular organisms.
  • invertebrate cells include insect cells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sp, Spodoptera high5 as well as plant cells.
  • useful mammalian host cell lines include Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and COS cells. More specific examples include monkey kidney CVl line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line [293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham, et al, J. Gen Virol, 36(l):59-74 (1977)]; Chinese hamster ovary cells/-DHFR [CHO, Urlaub and Chasin, Proc.
  • mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51).
  • MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51 mouse mammary tumor
  • LP polypeptides may be produced recombinantly not only directly, but also as a fusion polypeptide with a heterologous polypeptide, which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide.
  • the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or it may be a part of the LP polypeptide-encoding DNA that is inserted into the vector.
  • the signal sequence may be a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the group of the alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, lpp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II leaders.
  • the signal sequence may be, e.g., the yeast invertase leader, alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces cc-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Patent 5,010,182), or acid phosphatase leader, the C. albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179), or the signal described in WO 90/13646.
  • yeast invertase leader alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces cc-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Patent 5,010,182)
  • acid phosphatase leader the C. albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179)
  • mammalian signal sequences may be used to direct secretion of the protein, such as signal sequences from secreted polypeptides of the same or related species as well as viral secretory leaders.
  • Both expression and cloning vectors contain a nucleic acid sequence that enables the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast, and viruses.
  • the origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2 ⁇ plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (SV40, polyoma, adenovirus, VSV or BPV) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells.
  • Selection genes will typically contain a selection gene, also termed a selectable marker.
  • Typical selection genes encode proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxins, e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available from complex media, e.g., the gene encoding D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
  • suitable selectable markers for mammalian cells are those that enable the identification of cells competent to take up the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid, such as DHFR or thymidine kinase.
  • DHFR DHFR activity
  • yeast plasmid YRp7 yeast plasmid YRp7 [Stinchcomb, et al, Nature 282(5734):39-43 (1979); Kingsman, et al, Gene 7(2):141-52 (1979); Tschumper, et al, Gene 10(2):157-66 (1980)].
  • the trpl gene provides a selection marker for a mutant strain of yeast lacking the ability to grow in tryptophan, for example, ATCC No. 44076 or PEPCl [Jones, Genetics 85:23-33 (1977)].
  • Expression and cloning vectors usually contain a promoter operably linked to the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid sequence to direct mRNA synthesis. Promoters recognized by a variety of potential host cells are well known.
  • Promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include the P-lactamase and lactose promoter systems [Chang, et al, Nature 215(56S ⁇ ):6 ⁇ l-24 ( ⁇ 91S); Goeddd, et al, Nature 28 ⁇ (5132):544-S ( ⁇ 919)], alkaline phosphatase, a tryptophan (up) promoter system [Goeddel, Nucleic Acids Res. 8(18):4057-74 (1980); EP 36,776 published 30 September 1981], and hybrid promoters such as the tat promoter [deBoer, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80(l):21-5 (1983)]. Promoters for use in bacterial systems also will contain a Shine-Dai garno (S.D.) sequence operably linked to the DNA encoding LP polypeptide.
  • S.D. Shine-Dai garno
  • Suitable promoting sequences for use with yeast hosts include the promoters for 3-phosphoglycerate kinase [Hitzeman, et al, J. Biol. Chem.
  • glycolytic enzymes such as enolase, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, hexokinase, pyruvate decarboxylase, phosphofructokinase, glucose-6-phosphate isomerase, 3-phosphoglycerate mutase, pyruvate kinase, triosephosphate isomerase, phosphoglucose isomerase, and glucokinase.
  • enolase such as enolase, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, hexokinase, pyruvate decarboxylase, phosphofructokinase, glucose-6-phosphate isomerase, 3-phosphoglycerate mutase, pyruvate kinase, triosephosphate isomerase, phosphoglucose isomerase, and glucokinase.
  • yeast promoters which are inducible promoters having the additional advantage of transcription controlled by growth conditions, are the promoter regions for alcohol dehydrogenase 2, isocytochrome C, acid phosphatase, degradative enzymes associated with nitrogen metabolism, metallothionein, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, and enzymes responsible for maltose and galactose utilization. Suitable vectors and promoters for use in yeast expression are further described in EP 73,657.
  • LP transcription from vectors in mammalian host cells is controlled, for example, by promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus, adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2), bovine papilloma virus, avian sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a refrovirus, hepatitis-B virus and Simian Virus 40 (SV40), from heterologous mammalian promoters, e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter, and from heat-shock promoters, provided such promoters are compatible with the host cell systems.
  • viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus, adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2), bovine papilloma virus, avian sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a refrovirus, hepatitis-B virus and Simian Virus 40 (SV40),
  • Transcription of a polynucleotide encoding an LP polypeptide by higher eukaryotes may be increased by inserting an enhancer sequence into the vector.
  • Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription. Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, alpha-ketoprotein, and insulin). Typically, however, one will use an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40 enhancer on the late side of the replication origin (bp 100-270), the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers. The enhancer may be spliced into the vector at a position 5' or 3' to the LP polypeptide coding sequence but is preferably located at a site 5' from the promoter.
  • Expression vectors used in eukaryotic host cells will also contain sequences necessary for the termination of transcription and for stabilizing the mRNA. Such sequences are commonly available from the 5' and occasionally 3' untranslated regions of eukaryotic or viral DNAs or cDNAs. These regions contain nucleotide segments transcribed as polyadenylated fragments in the untranslated portion of the mRNA encoding LP. Gene amplification and/or expression may be measured in a sample directly, for example, by conventional Southern blotting, Northern blotting to quantitate the transcription of mRNA [Thomas, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • duplexes including DNA duplexes, RNA duplexes, and DNA- RNA hybrid duplexes or DNA-protein duplexes.
  • the antibodies in turn may be labeled and the assay may be carried out where the duplex is bound to a surface, so that upon the formation of duplex on the surface, the presence of antibody bound to the duplex can be detected.
  • Gene expression may be measured by immunological methods, such as immunohistochemical staining of cells or tissue sections and assay of cell culture or body fluids, to quantitate directly the expression of gene product.
  • Antibodies useful for immunohistochemical staining and/or assay of sample fluids may be either monoclonal or polyclonal and may be prepared in any mammal. Conveniently, the antibodies may be prepared against a native sequence provided herein or against exogenous sequence fused to an LP polypeptide-encoding DNA and encoding a specific antibody epitope.
  • an LP polypeptide may be recovered from culture medium or from host cell lysates. If membrane-bound, it can be released from the membrane using a suitable detergent solution (e.g., Triton X-100 ⁇ ) or by enzymatic cleavage. Cells employed in expression of an LP polypeptide can be disrupted by various physical or chemical means, such as freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or cell lysing agents.
  • a suitable detergent solution e.g., Triton X-100 ⁇
  • Cells employed in expression of an LP polypeptide can be disrupted by various physical or chemical means, such as freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or cell lysing agents.
  • LP polypeptides may be desireable to purify LP polypeptides from recombinant cell proteins or polypeptides.
  • the following procedures are exemplary of suitable purification procedures: by fractionation on an ion-exchange column; ethanol precipitation; reversed- phase HPLC; chromatography on silica or on a cation-exchange resin such as DEAE; chromatofocusing; SDS-PAGE; ammonium sulfate precipitation; gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex ® G-75; protein A Sepharose ® columns to remove contaminants such as IgG; and metal chelating columns to bind epitope-tagged forms of an LP polypeptide.
  • LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acids will also be useful for the preparation of LP polypeptides by the recombinant techniques described herein.
  • the full-length LP polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequence e.g., SEQ ID NO: 1
  • hybridization probes for probing a cDNA or genomic library to isolate the full-length LP polypeptide-encoding cDNA or genomic sequences including promoters, enhancer elements and introns of native sequence LP polypeptide-encoding DNA or to isolate still other genes (for instance, those encoding naturally-occurring variants of LP polypeptides or the same from other species) which have a desired sequence identity to the LP polypeptide- encoding nucleotide sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, or 9.
  • Hybridization techniques are well known in the art and some of which are described in further detail in the Examples below.
  • LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acids include anti- sense or sense oligonucleotides comprising a single-stranded nucleic acid sequence (either RNA or DNA) capable of binding to target LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA (sense) of LP polypeptide-encoding DNA (anti-sense) sequences.
  • Anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides comprise a fragment of the coding region of LP polypeptide-encoding DNA. Such a fragment generally comprises at least about 14 nucleotides, preferably from about 14 to 30 nucleotides.
  • binding of anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides to target nucleic acid sequences results in the formation of duplexes that block transcription or translation of the target sequence by one of several means, including enhanced degradation of the duplexes, premature termination of transcription or translation, or by other means.
  • the anti-sense oligonucleotides thus may be used to block expression of LP mRNA and therefore any LP polypeptide encoded thereby.
  • Anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides further comprise oligonucleotides having modified sugar-phosphodiester backbones (or other sugar linkages, such as those described in WO 91/06629) and wherein such sugar linkages are resistant to endogenous nucleases.
  • Such oligonucleotides with resistant sugar linkages are stable in vivo (i.e., capable of resisting enzymatic degradation) but retain sequence specificity to be able to bind to target nucleotide sequences.
  • sense or anti-sense oligonucleotides include those oligonucleotides which are covalently linked to organic moieties, such as those described in WO 90/10448, and other moieties that increase affinity of the oligonucleotide for a target nucleic acid sequence, such poly-L-lysine.
  • intercalating agents such as ellipticine, and alkylating agents or metal complexes may be attached to sense or anti- sense oligonucleotides to modify binding specificities of the anti-sense or sense oligonucleotide for the target nucleotide sequence.
  • Anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides may be introduced into a cell containing the target nucleic acid sequence by any gene transfer method, including, for example, calcium phosphate-mediated DNA fransfection, electroporation, or by using gene transfer vectors such as Epstein-Barr virus.
  • an anti-sense or sense oligonucleotide is inserted into a suitable retroviral vector.
  • a cell containing the target nucleic acid sequence is contacted with the recombinant retroviral vector, either in vivo or ex vivo.
  • Suitable retroviral vectors include, but are not limited to, those derived from the murine retrovirus M-MSV, N2 (a retrovirus derived from M-MuLV), or the double copy vectors designated CDTSA, CTSB and DCTSC (see WO 90/13641).
  • a sense or an anti-sense oligonucleotide may be introduced into a cell containing the target nucleic acid sequence by formation of an oligonucleotide-lipid complex, as described in WO 90/10448.
  • the sense or anti-sense oligonucleotide-lipid complex is preferably dissociated within the cell by an endogenous lipase.
  • the LP polypeptide can be used in assays to identify the other proteins or molecules involved in the binding interaction. By such methods, inhibitors of the receptor/ligand binding interaction can be identified. Proteins involved in such binding interactions can also be used to screen for peptide or small molecule inhibitors or agonists of the binding interaction. Also, the receptor LP polypeptide can be used to isolate correlative ligand(s). Screening assays can be designed to find lead compounds that mimic the biological activity of the LP polypeptides disclosed herein or a receptor for such LP polypeptides.
  • Typical screening assays will include assays amenable to high-throughput screening of chemical libraries, making them particularly suitable for identifying small molecule drug candidates.
  • Small molecules contemplated include synthetic organic or inorganic compounds.
  • the assays can be performed in a variety of formats, including protein- protein binding assays, biochemical screening assays, immunoassays and cell based assays, which are well characterized in the art.
  • Nucleic acids which encode an LP polypeptide of the present invention or any of its modified forms can also be used to generate either transgenic animals or "knockout" animals which, in turn, are useful in the development and screening of therapeutically useful reagents.
  • Methods for generating transgenic animals, particularly animals such as mice or rats, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Patents 4,736,866 and 4,870,009.
  • particular cells would be targeted for an LP transgene incorporation with tissue-specific enhancers.
  • Transgenic animals that include a copy of a transgene introduced into the germ line of the animal at an embryonic stage can be used to examine the effect of increased expression of DNA encoding an LP polypeptide.
  • Such animals can be used as tester animals for reagents thought to confer protection from, for example, pathological conditions associated with its overexpression.
  • an animal is treated with the reagent and a reduced incidence of the pathological condition, compared to untreated animals bearing the transgene, would indicate a potential therapeutic intervention for the pathological condition.
  • non-human homologs of LP polynucleotides can be used to construct a "knockout" animal which has a defective or altered gene encoding a particular LP polypeptide as a result of homologous recombination between the endogenous gene encoding the LP polypeptide and the altered genomic DNA introduced into an embryonic cell of the animal.
  • cDNA encoding an LP polypeptide can be used to clone genomic DNA encoding that LP polypeptide in accordance with established techniques.
  • a portion of the genomic DNA encoding an LP polypeptide can be deleted or replaced with another gene, such as a gene encoding a selectable marker which can be used to monitor integration.
  • another gene such as a gene encoding a selectable marker which can be used to monitor integration.
  • several kilobases of unaltered flanking DNA are included in the vector [see, e.g., Thomas and Capecchi, Cell 51(3):503-12 (1987) for a description of homologous recombination vectors].
  • the vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation), and cells in which the introduced DNA has homologously recombined with the endogenous DNA are selected [see, e.g., Li, et al, Cell 69(6):915-26 (1992)].
  • the selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse or rat) to form aggregation chimeras [see, e.g., Bradley, Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed., pp. 113-152 (IRL, Oxford, 1987)].
  • a chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term to create a "knockout" animal.
  • Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be identified by standard techniques and used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA.
  • Knockout animals can be characterized, for instance, for their ability to defend against certain pathological conditions and for their development of pathological conditions due to absence of the native LP polypeptide.
  • Transgenic non-human mammals are useful as an animal models in both basic research and drug development endeavors.
  • Transgenic animals expressing at least one LP polypeptide or nucleic acid can be used to test compounds or other treatment modalities which may prevent, suppress, or cure a pathology or disease associated with at least one of the above mentioned activities.
  • Such transgenic animals can also serve as a model for the testing of diagnostic methods for those same diseases.
  • tissues derived from such transgenic non-human mammals are useful as a source of cells for cell culture in efforts to develop in vitro bioassays to identify compounds that modulate LP polypeptide activity or LP polypeptide dependent signaling.
  • another aspect of the present invention contemplates a method of identifying compounds efficacious in the treatment of at least one previously described disease or pathology associated with an LP polypeptide associated activity.
  • a non-limiting example of such a method comprises: a) generating a transgenic non-human animal which expresses an LP polypeptide of the present invention and which is, as compared to a wild-type animal, pathologically distinct in some detectable or measurable manner from wild-type version of said non- human mammal; b) exposing said transgenic animal to a compound, and; c) determining the progression of the pathology in the treated transgenic animal, wherein an arrest, delay, or reversal in disease progression in transgenic animal treated with said compound as compared to the progression of the pathology in an untreated control animals is indicative that the compound is useful for the treatment of said pathology.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention provides a method of identifying compounds capable of inhibiting LP polypeptide activity in vivo and/or in vitro wherein said method comprises: a) administering an experimental compound to an LP polypeptide expressing transgenic non-human animal, or tissues derived therefrom, exhibiting one or more physiological or pathological conditions attributable to the expression of an LP transgene; and b) observing or assaying said animal and/or animal tissues to detect changes in said physiological or pathological condition or conditions.
  • Another embodiment of the invention provides a method for identifying compounds capable of overcoming deficiencies in LP polypeptide activity in vivo or in vitro wherein said method comprises: a) administering an experimental compound to an LP polypeptide expressing transgenic non-human animal, or tissues derived therefrom, exhibiting one or more physiological or pathological conditions attributable to the disruption of the endogenous LP polypeptide-encoding gene; and b) observing or assaying said animal and/or animal tissues to detect changes in said physiological or pathological condition or conditions.
  • Various means for determining a compound's ability to modulate the activity of an LP polypeptide in the body of the transgenic animal are consistent with the invention. Observing the reversal of a pathological condition in the LP polypeptide expressing transgenic animal after administering a compound is one such means. Another more preferred means is to assay for markers of LP activity in the blood of a transgenic animal before and after administering an experimental compound to the animal. The level of skill of an artisan in the relevant arts readily provides the practitioner with numerous methods for assaying physiological changes related to therapeutic modulation of LP activity.
  • Gene therapy includes both conventional gene therapy, where a lasting effect is achieved by a single treatment, and the administration of gene therapeutic agents, which involves the one time or repeated administration of a therapeutically effective DNA or mRNA.
  • Anti-sense RNAs and DNAs can be used as therapeutic agents for blocking the expression of certain genes in vivo. It has already been shown that short anti-sense oligonucleotides can be imported into cells where they act as inhibitors, despite their low intracellular concentrations caused by their restricted uptake by the cell membrane [Zamecnik, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad Sci. USA 83(12):4143-6 (1986)]. The oligonucleotides can be modified to enhance their uptake, e.g., by substituting their negatively charged phosphodiester groups with uncharged groups.
  • nucleic acids there are a variety of techniques available for introducing nucleic acids into viable cells.
  • the techniques vary depending upon whether the nucleic acid is transferred into cultured cell in vitro or in vivo in the cells of the intended host.
  • Techniques suitable for the transfer of nucleic acid into mammalian cells in vitro include the use of liposomes, electroporation, microinjection, cell fusion, DEAE-dextran, the calcium phosphate precipitation method, etc.
  • the currently preferred in vivo gene transfer techniques include transfection with viral (typically, retroviral) vectors and viral coat protein- liposo e mediated transfection [Dzau, et al, Trends in Biotechnology 11(5):205-10 (1993)].
  • the nucleic acid source with an agent that targets the target cells, such as an antibody specific for a cell surface membrane protein or the target cell, a ligand for a receptor on the target cells, etc.
  • an agent that targets the target cells such as an antibody specific for a cell surface membrane protein or the target cell, a ligand for a receptor on the target cells, etc.
  • proteins which bind to a cell surface membrane protein associated with endocytosis may by used for targeting and/or to facilitate uptake, e.g., capsid proteins or fragments thereof trophic for a particular cell type, antibodies for proteins which undergo internalization in cycling, proteins that target intracellular localization and enhance intracellular half-life.
  • the technique of receptor-mediated endocytosis is described, for example, by Wu, et al, J. Biol. Chem.
  • nucleic acid molecules encoding LP polypeptides or fragments thereof described herein are useful for chromosome identification.
  • Each LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of the present invention can be used as a chromosome marker.
  • An LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid or fragments thereof can also be used for chromosomal localization of the gene encoding that LP polypeptide.
  • the present invention further provides anti-LP polypeptide antibodies.
  • Exemplary antibodies include polyclonal, monoclonal, humanized, bispecific, and heteroconjugate antibodies.
  • the anti-LP polypeptide antibodies of the present invention may comprise polyclonal antibodies. Methods of preparing polyclonal antibodies are known to the skilled artisan. Polyclonal antibodies can be raised in a mammal, for example, by one or more injections of an immunizing agent and, if desired, an adjuvant. Typically, the immunizing agent and/or adjuvant will be injected in the mammal by multiple subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections.
  • the immunizing agent may include the LP polypeptide or a fusion protein thereof. It may be useful to conjugate the immunizing agent to a protein known to be immunogenic in the mammal being immunized. Examples of such immunogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, and soybean trypsin inhibitor.
  • adjuvants examples include Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose dicorynomycolate).
  • the immunization protocol may be selected by one skilled in the art without undue experimentation.
  • the anti-LP polypeptide antibodies may, alternatively, be monoclonal antibodies.
  • Monoclonal antibodies may be prepared using hybridoma methods, such as those described by Kohler and Milstein, N twre 256(5517):495-7 (1975).
  • a hybridoma method a mouse, hamster, or other appropriate host animal is typically immunized with an immunizing agent to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the immunizing agent.
  • the lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro.
  • the immunizing agent will typically include an LP polypeptide or a fusion protein thereof.
  • PBLs peripheral blood lymphocytes
  • spleen cells or lymph node cells are used, if non-human mammalian sources are desired.
  • the lymphocytes are then fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell [Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, Academic Press, pp. 59- 103 (1986)].
  • Immortalized cell lines are usually transformed mammalian cells, particularly myeloma cells of rodent, bovine and human origin.
  • rat or mouse myeloma cell lines are employed.
  • the hybridoma cells may be cultured in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, immortalized cells.
  • a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, immortalized cells.
  • the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (“HAT medium”), which prevents the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.
  • HAT medium hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine
  • Preferred immortalized cell lines are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high level expression of antibody by the selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium.
  • More preferred immortalized cell lines are murine myeloma lines, which can be obtained, for instance, from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center, San Diego, CA, and the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Rockville, MD.
  • Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies [Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133(6):3001-5 (1984); Brodeur, et al, Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., NY, pp. 51-63 (1987)].
  • the culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are cultured can then be assayed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed against an LP polypeptide.
  • the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies produced by the hybridoma cells is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA).
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay
  • the binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson and Rodbard, Anal. Biochem. 107(l):220-39 ( 1980).
  • the clones may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods [Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, Academic Press, pp. 59-103 (1986)].
  • Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium and RPMI-1640 medium.
  • the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites in a mammal.
  • the monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA methods, such as those described in U.S. Patent 4,816,567.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies).
  • the hybridoma cells of the invention serve as a preferred source of such DNA.
  • the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells.
  • host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells.
  • the DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for human heavy and light chain constant domains in place of the homologous murine sequences [U.S. Patent 4,816,567; Morrison, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • non-immunoglobulin polypeptide can be substituted for the constant domains of an antibody of the invention or can be substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody of the invention to create a chimeric bivalent antibody.
  • the antibodies may be monovalent antibodies.
  • Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, one method involves recombinant expression of immunoglobulin light chain and modified heavy chain.
  • the heavy chain is truncated generally at any point in the Fc region so as to prevent heavy chain crosslinking.
  • the relevant cysteine residues are substituted with another amino acid residue or are deleted so as to prevent crosslinking.
  • In vitro methods are also suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
  • the anti-LP polypeptide antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized antibodies or human antibodies.
  • Humanized forms of non-human (e.g., murine) antibodies are chimeric immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab') or other antigen-binding subsequences of antibodies) which contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin.
  • Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a complementary-determining region (CDR) of the recipient are replaced by residues from a CDR of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat or rabbit having the desired specificity, affinity and capacity.
  • CDR complementary-determining region
  • Fv framework residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non- human residues.
  • Humanized antibodies may also comprise residues which are found neither in the recipient antibody nor in the imported CDR or framework sequences.
  • the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin, and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence.
  • the humanized antibody optimally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin [Jones, et al, Nature 321 (6069):522-5 (1986); Riechmann, et al, Nature 332(6162):323-7 (1988); and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol 2:593-6 (1992)].
  • Fc immunoglobulin constant region
  • a humanized antibody has one or more amino acid residues introduced into it from a source which is non-human. These non-human amino acid residues are often referred to as "import" residues, which are typically taken from an "import” variable domain. Humanization can be essentially performed following the method of Winter and co-workers [Jones, et al, Nature 321(6069):522-5 (1986); Riechmann, et al, Nature 332(6162):323-7 (1988); Verhoeyen, et al., Science 239(4847): 1534-6 (1988)], by substituting rodent CDRs or CDR sequences for the corresponding sequences of a human antibody.
  • humanized antibodies are chimeric antibodies (U.S. Patent 4,816,567) wherein substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species.
  • humanized antibodies are typically human antibodies in which some CDR residues and possibly some FR residues are substituted by residues from analogous sites in rodent antibodies.
  • Human antibodies can also be produced using various techniques known in the art, including phage display libraries [Hoogenboom and Winter, J. Mol. Biol. 227(2):381- 8 (1992); Marks, et al, J. Mol. Biol 222(3):581 -97 (1991)].
  • the techniques of Cole, et al, and Boerner, et al, are also available for the preparation of human monoclonal antibodies (Cole, et al, Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, p. 77 (1985), and Boerner, et al, J. Immunol. 147(l):86-95 (1991)].
  • human antibodies can be made by introducing human immunoglobulin loci into transgenic animals, e.g., mice in which the endogenous immunoglobulin genes have been partially or completely inactivated. Upon challenge, human antibody production is observed, which closely resembles that seen in humans in all respects, including gene rearrangement, assembly and antibody repertoire. This approach is described, for example, in U.S.
  • Bispecific antibodies are monoclonal, preferably human or humanized, antibodies that have binding specificities for at least two different antigens.
  • one of the binding specificities is for an LP polypeptide, the other one is for any other antigen, and preferably for a cell-surface protein or receptor or receptor subunit.
  • Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art.
  • Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated.
  • trispecific antibodies can be prepared [Tutt, et al, J Immunol. 147(l):60-9 (1991)].
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies are also within the scope of the present invention.
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies are composed of two covalently joined antibodies. Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells [U.S. Patent 4,676,980], and for treatment of HIV infection [WO 91/00360; WO 92/20373].
  • the antibodies may be prepared in vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents.
  • immunotoxins may be constructed using a disulfide exchange reaction or by forming a thioether bond. Examples of suitable reagents for this purpose include iminothiolate and methyl-4-mercaptobutyrimidate and those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent 4,676,980.
  • the invention also pertains to immunoconjugates comprising an antibody conjugated to a cytotoxic agent such as a chemotherapeutic agent, toxin (e.g., an enzymatically active toxin of bacterial, fungal, plant or animal origin, or fragments thereof, or a small molecule toxin), or a radioactive isotope (i.e., a radioconjugate).
  • a cytotoxic agent such as a chemotherapeutic agent, toxin (e.g., an enzymatically active toxin of bacterial, fungal, plant or animal origin, or fragments thereof, or a small molecule toxin), or a radioactive isotope (i.e., a radioconjugate).
  • Conjugates of the antibody and cytotoxic agent are made using a variety of bifunctional protein coupling agents such as N-succinimidyl-3-(2-pyridyldithiol) propionate (SPDP), iminothiolane (IT), bifunctional derivatives of imidoesters (such as dimethyl adipimidate HCL), active esters (such as disuccinimidyl suberate), aldehydes (such as glutaraldehyde), bis-azido compounds, bis-diazonium derivatives (such as bis-2- diazoniumbenzoyl)-ethylenediamine) diisocyanates (such as tolylene-2,6-diisocyanate), and bioactive fluorine compounds.
  • SPDP N-succinimidyl-3-(2-pyridyldithiol) propionate
  • IT iminothiolane
  • bifunctional derivatives of imidoesters such as dimethyl adipimidate HCL
  • a ricin immunotoxin can be prepared as described in Vitetta, et al, Science 238(4830):1098-104 (1987).
  • Carbon- 14-labeled 1- isothiocyanatobenzyl-3-methyldiethylene triaminepentaacetic acid (MX-DTPA) is an exemplary chelating agent for conjugation of radionucleotide to the antibody.
  • the antibody may be conjugated to a "receptor” (such as streptavidin) for utilization in tumor pretargeting wherein the antibody-receptor conjugate is administered to the patient, followed by removal of unbound conjugate from the circulation using a clearing agent, and then administration of a "ligand” (e.g., avidin) which is conjugated to a cytotoxic agent (e.g., a radionucleotide).
  • a receptor such as streptavidin
  • a ligand e.g., avidin
  • cytotoxic agent e.g., a radionucleotide
  • the antibodies disclosed herein may also be formulated as immunoliposomes.
  • Liposomes containing the antibody are prepared by methods known in the art, such as described in Eppstein, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:3688-92 (1985); Hwang, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77(7):4030-4 (1980); and U.S. Patents 4,485,045 and 4,544,545. Liposomes with enhanced circulation time are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,013,556.
  • Particularly useful liposomes can be generated by the reverse phase evaporation method with a lipid composition comprising phosphatidylcholine, cholesterol and PEG- derivatized phosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-PE). Liposomes are extruded through filters of defined pore size to yield liposomes with the desired diameter.
  • Fab' fragments of the antibody of the present invention can be conjugated to the liposomes as described in Martin, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 257(l):286-8 (1982) via a disulfide interchange reaction.
  • a chemotherapeutic agent such as Doxorubicin is optionally contained within the liposome. See Gabizon, et al, J. National Cancer Inst. 81(19):484-8 ( 1989).
  • Antibodies specifically binding an LP polypeptide identified herein, as well as other molecules identified by the screening assays disclosed hereinbefore, can be administered for the treatment of various disorders in the form of pharmaceutical compositions.
  • an LP polypeptide is intracellular and whole antibodies are used as inhibitors, internalizing antibodies are preferred.
  • lipofections or liposomes can also be used to deliver the antibody or an antibody fragment into cells.
  • the smallest inhibitory fragment that specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is preferred.
  • peptide molecules can be designed that retain the ability to bind the target protein sequence.
  • Such peptides can be synthesized chemically and/or produced by recombinant DNA technology. See, e.g., Marasco, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90(16):7889-93 (1993).
  • the formulation herein may also contain more than one active compound as necessary for the particular indication being treated, preferably those with complementary activities that do not adversely affect each other.
  • the composition may comprise an agent that enhances its function, such as, for example, a cytotoxic agent, cytokines, chemotherapeutic agent, or growth-inhibitory agent.
  • cytotoxic agent such as, for example, a cytotoxic agent, cytokines, chemotherapeutic agent, or growth-inhibitory agent.
  • Such molecules are suitable present in combination in amounts that are effective for the purpose intended.
  • the active ingredients may also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly- (methylmethacrylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles, and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions.
  • colloidal drug delivery systems for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles, and nanocapsules
  • the formulations to be used for in vivo administration must be sterile. This is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes.
  • Sustained-release preparations may be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained- release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the antibody, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol), polylactides (U.S.
  • encapsulated antibodies When encapsulated antibodies remain in the body for a long time, they may denature or aggregate as a result of exposure to moisture at 37 degrees C, resulting in a loss of biological activity and possible changes in immunogenicity. Rational strategies can be devised for stabilization depending on the mechanisms involved. For example, if the aggregation mechanism is discovered to be intermolecular S-S bond formation through thiosulfide interchange, stabilization may be achieved by modifying sulfhydryl residues, lyophilizing from acidic solutions, controlling moisture content, using appropriate additives, and developing specific polymer matrix compositions.
  • the anti-LP polypeptide antibodies of the present invention have various utilities.
  • such antibodies may be used in diagnostic assays for LP polypeptide expression, e.g., detecting expression in specific cells, tissues, or serum.
  • diagnostic assay techniques known in the art may be used, such as competitive binding assays, direct or indirect sandwich assays and immunoprecipitation assays conducted in either heterogeneous or homogeneous phases [Zola, Monoclonal Antibodies.A Manual of Techniques, CRC Press, Inc., pp. 147-158 (1987)].
  • the antibodies used in the assays can be labeled with a detectable moiety.
  • the detectable moiety should be capable of producing, either directly or indirectly, a detectable signal.
  • the detectable moiety may be a radioisotope, such as 3 H, 1 C, 2 P, 35 S, or 125 I, a fluorescent or chemiluminescent compound, such as fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, or luciferin, or an enzyme, such as alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase or horseradish peroxidase.
  • a radioisotope such as 3 H, 1 C, 2 P, 35 S, or 125 I
  • a fluorescent or chemiluminescent compound such as fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, or luciferin
  • an enzyme such as alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase or horseradish peroxidase.
  • Any method known in the art for conjugating the antibody to the detectable moiety may be employed, including those methods described by Hunter, et al, Nature 144:945 (1962); David, et
  • Anti-LP polypeptide antibodies also are useful for affinity purification from recombinant cell culture or natural sources.
  • the antibodies are immobilized on a suitable support, such a Sephadex resin or filter paper, using methods well known in the art.
  • the immobilized antibody is then contacted with a sample containing the LP polypeptide to be purified, and thereafter the support is washed with a suitable solvent that will remove substantially all the material in the sample except the LP polypeptide, which is bound to the immobilized antibody. Finally, the support is washed with another suitable solvent that will release the desired polypeptide from the antibody.
  • This invention encompasses methods of screening compounds to identify those that mimic the activity of the LP polypeptide (agonists) disclosed herein or prevent the effects of the LP polypeptide (antagonists).
  • Screening assays for antagonist drug candidates are designed to identity compounds that bind or complex with an LP polypeptide encoded by the genes identified herein or otherwise interfere with the interaction of LP polypeptides with other cellular proteins.
  • Such screening assays will include assays amenable to high-throughput screening of chemical libraries, making them particularly suitable for identifying small molecule drug candidates.
  • the assays can be performed in a variety of formats. In binding assays, the interaction is binding, and the complex formed can be isolated or detected in the reaction mixture.
  • an LP polypeptide encoded by a gene identified herein or the drug candidate is immobilized on a solid phase, e.g., on a microtiter plate, by covalent or non-covalent attachments.
  • Non-covalent attachment generally is accomplished by coating the solid surface with a solution comprising LP polypeptide and drying.
  • an immobilized antibody e.g., a monoclonal antibody, specific for the polypeptide to be immobilized can be used to anchor it to a solid surface.
  • the assay is performed by adding the non-immobilized component, which may be labeled by a detectable label, to the immobilized component, e.g., the coated surface containing the anchored component.
  • the non-reacted components are removed, e.g., by washing, and complexes anchored on the solid surface are detected.
  • the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexing occurred.
  • complexing can be detected, for example, by using a labeled antibody specifically binding the immobilized complex.
  • the candidate compound interacts with but does not bind to an LP polypeptide
  • its interaction with that polypeptide can be assayed by methods well known for detecting protein-protein interactions.
  • assays include traditional approaches, such as, e.g., cross-linking, co-immunoprecipitation, and co-purification through gradients or chromatographic columns.
  • protein-protein interactions can be monitored through gradients or chromatographic columns.
  • protein-protein interactions can be monitored by using a yeast-based genetic system described by Fields and co- workers [Fields and Song, Nature 340(6230):245-6 (1989); Chien, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • yeast GAL4 Many transcriptional activators, such as yeast GAL4, consist of two physically discrete modular domains, one acting as the DNA-binding domain, while the other functions as the transcription-activation domain.
  • yeast expression system described in the foregoing publications (generally referred to as the "two-hybrid system") takes advantage of this property, and employs two hybrid proteins, one in which the target protein is fused to the DNA-binding domain of GAL4, and another in which candidate activating proteins are fused to the activation domain.
  • GALl-lacZ reporter gene under control of a GAL4-activated promoter depends on reconstitution of GAL4 activity via protein-protein interaction. Colonies containing interacting polypeptides are detected with chromogenic substrate for beta- galactosidase.
  • a complete kit (MATCHMAKERTM) for identifying protein-protein interactions between two specific proteins using the two-hybrid technique is commercially available from Clontech. This system can also be extended to map protein domains involved in specific protein interactions as well as to pinpoint amino acid residues that are crucial for these interactions.
  • a reaction mixture is prepared containing the product of the gene and the intra- or extracellular component under conditions and for a time allowing for the interaction and binding of the two products.
  • a candidate compound to inhibit binding, the reaction is run in the absence and in the presence of the test compound.
  • a placebo may be added to a third reaction mixture to serve as a positive control.
  • the binding (complex formation) between the test compound and the intra- or extracellular component present in the mixture is monitored as described hereinabove. The formation of a complex in the control reaction(s) but not in the reaction mixture containing the test compound indicates that the test compound interferes with the interaction of the test compound and its reaction partner.
  • Antagonists may be detected by combining at least one LP polypeptide and a potential antagonist with a membrane-bound or recombinant receptor for that LP polypeptide under appropriate conditions for a competitive inhibition assay.
  • the LP polypeptide can be labeled, such as by radioactivity, such that the number of LP polypeptide molecules bound to the receptor can be used to determine the effectiveness of the potential antagonist.
  • the gene encoding the receptor for an LP polypeptide can be identified by numerous methods known to those of skill in the art, for example, ligand panning and FACS sorting. See Coligan, et al, Current Protocols in Immunology l(2):Ch. 5 (1991).
  • expression cloning is employed such that polyadenylated mRNA is prepared from a cell responsive to the secreted form of a particular LP polypeptide, and a cDNA library created from this mRNA is divided into pools and used to transfect COS cells or other cells that are not responsive to the secreted LP polypeptide.
  • Transfected cells that are grown on glass slides are exposed to the labeled LP polypeptide.
  • the LP polypeptide can be labeled by a variety of means including iodination or inclusion of a recognition site for a site-specific protein kinase. Following fixation and incubation, the slides are subjected to autoradiographic analysis. Positive pools are identified and sub-pools are prepared and re-transfected using an interactive sub-pooling and re-screening process, eventually yielding a single clone that encodes the putative receptor.
  • a labeled LP polypeptide can be photoaffinity-linked with cell membrane or extract preparations that express the receptor molecule. Cross-linked material is resolved by PAGE and exposed to X-ray film. The labeled complex containing the receptor can be excised, resolved into peptide fragments, and subjected to protein micro-sequencing. The amino acid sequence obtained from micro-sequencing would be used to design a set of degenerate oligonucleotide probes to screen a cDNA library to identify the gene encoding the putative receptor.
  • mammalian cells or a membrane preparation expressing the receptor would be incubated with a labeled LP polypeptide in the presence of the candidate compound. The ability of the compound to enhance or block this interaction could then be removed.
  • a potential antagonist may be a closely related protein, for example, a mutated form of the LP polypeptide that recognizes the receptor but imparts no effect, thereby competitively inhibiting the action of the polypeptide.
  • Another potential LP antagonist is an anti-sense RNA or DNA construct prepared using anti-sense technology, where, e.g., an anti-sense RNA or DNA molecule acts to block directly the translation of mRNA by hybridizing to targeted mRNA and prevent its translation into protein.
  • Anti-sense technology can be used to control gene expression through triple-helix formation or anti-sense DNA or RNA, both of which methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to DNA or RNA.
  • the 5' coding portion of the polynucleotide sequence, which encodes the mature form of an LP polypeptide can be used to design an anti-sense RNA oligonucleotide sequence of about 10 to 40 base pairs in length.
  • a DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription [triple helix; see Lee, et al, Nucl. Acids Res 6(9):3073-91 (1979); Cooney, et al, Science 241(4864):456-9 (1988); Beal and Dervan, Science 251(4999): 1360-3 (1991)], thereby preventing transcription and production of the LP polypeptide.
  • the anti-sense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecules [anti-sense; see Okano, J. Neurochem.
  • oligodeoxynucleotides as Anti-sense Inhibitors of Gene Expression (CRC Press: Boca Raton, FL 1988)].
  • the oligonucleotides described above can also be delivered to cells such that the anti-sense RNA or DNA may be expressed in vivo to inhibit production of the LP polypeptide.
  • anti-sense DNA oligodeoxyribonucleotides derived from the translation-initiation site, e.g., between about -10 and +10 positions of the target gene nucleotide sequence, are preferred.
  • Potential antagonists include small molecules that bind to the active site, the receptor binding site, or growth factor or other relevant binding site of the LP polypeptide, thereby blocking the normal biological activity of the LP polypeptide.
  • small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide- like molecules, preferably soluble peptides, and synthetic non-peptidyl organic or inorganic compounds.
  • Ribozymes are enzymatic RNA molecules capable of catalyzing the specific cleavage of RNA. Ribozymes act by sequence-specific hybridization to the complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Specific ribozyme cleavage sites within a potential RNA target can be identified by known techniques. For further details, see, e.g., Rossi, Current Biology 4(5):469-71 (1994) and PCT publication No. WO 97/33551 (published September 18, 1997).
  • Nucleic acid molecules in triple-helix formation used to inhibit transcription should be single-stranded and composed of deoxynucleotides.
  • the base composition of these oligonucleotides is designed such that it promotes triple-helix formation via
  • Another use of the compounds of the invention is to help diagnose whether a disorder is driven to some extent by the modulation of signaling by an LP polypeptide
  • a diagnostic assay to determine whether a particular disorder is driven by LP polypeptide dependent signaling can be carried out using the following steps: a) culturing test cells or tissues expressing an LP polypeptide; b) administering a compound which can inhibit LP polypeptide dependent signaling; and c) measuring LP polypeptide mediated phenotypic effects in the test cells.
  • the steps can be carried out using standard techniques in light of the present disclosure. Appropriate controls take into account the possible cytotoxic effect of a compound, such as treating cells not associated with a cell proliferative disorder (e.g., confrol cells) with a test compound and can also be used as part of the diagnostic assay.
  • the diagnostic methods of the invention involve the screening for agents that modulate the effects of LP polypeptide-associated disorders.
  • LP polypeptides or antibodies thereto as well as LP polypeptide antagonists or agonists can be employed as therapeutic agents.
  • Such therapeutic agents are formulated according to known methods to prepare pharmaceutically useful compositions, whereby the LP polypeptide or antagonist or agonist thereof is combined in a mixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • LP polypeptide antagonistic or agonistic antibodies if the LP polypeptide is intracellular and whole antibodies are used as inhibitors, internalizing antibodies are preferred. However, lipofections or liposomes can also be used to deliver the antibody, or an antibody fragment, into cells. Where antibody fragments are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment which specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is preferred. For example, based upon the variable region sequences of an antibody, peptide molecules can be designed which retain the ability to bind the target protein sequence. Such peptides can be synthesized chemically and/or produced by reco binant DNA technology [see, e.g., Marasco, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90(16):7889-93 (1993)].
  • Therapeutic formulations are prepared for storage by mixing the active ingredient having the desired degree of purity with optional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients or stabilizers [Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences 16th edition (1980)], in the form of lyophilized formulations or aqueous solutions.
  • the formulation herein may also contain more than one active compound as necessary for the particular indication being treated, preferably those with complementary activities that do not adversely affect each other. Such molecules are suitably present in combination in amounts that are effective for the purpose intended.
  • the active ingredients may also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacrylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, supra.
  • compositions to be used for in vivo administration must be sterile. This is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes.
  • Therapeutic compositions herein generally are placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, and intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle.
  • Sustained-release preparations may be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained- release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent(s), which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules.
  • sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels [for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol)], polylactides, copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate, non- degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate, degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as the LUPRON DEPOTTM (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate), and poly-D-(-)-3-hydroxybutyric acid.
  • polyesters for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol)
  • polylactides copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate
  • non- degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate non- degradable ethylene-viny
  • the sustained-release formulations of these proteins may be developed using polylactic-coglycolic acid (PLGA) polymer due to its biocompatibility and wide range of biodegradable properties.
  • PLGA polylactic-coglycolic acid
  • the degradation products of PLGA, lactic and glycolic acids, can be cleared quickly within the human body.
  • the degradability of this polymer can be adjusted from months to years depending on its molecular weight and composition. See Lewis, "Controlled release of bioactive agents from lactide/glycolide polymer" in Biodegradable Polymers as Drug Delivery Systems (Marcel Dekker; New York, 1990), M. Chasin and R. Langer (Eds.) pp. 1-41.
  • the compounds including, but not limited to, antibodies, small organic and inorganic molecules, peptides, anti-sense molecules, ribozymes, etc., of the present invention may be used to treat various conditions including those characterized by overexpression and/or activation of the disease-associated genes identified herein.
  • the active agents of the present invention are administered to a mammal, preferably a human, in accord with known methods, such as intravenous administration as a bolus or by continuous infusion over a period of time, by intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intracerobrospinal, subcutaneous, intra- articular, intrasynovial, intrathecal, intraoccular, intralesional, oral, topical, inhalation, pulmonary, and/or through sustained release.
  • Other therapeutic regimens may be combined with the administration of LP polypeptide antagonists or antagonists, anti-cancer agents, e.g., antibodies of the instant invention.
  • an active agent e.g., an antibody, polypeptide, nucleic acid, ribozyme, or small organic or inorganic molecule
  • an active agent e.g., an antibody, polypeptide, nucleic acid, ribozyme, or small organic or inorganic molecule
  • the agent is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments.
  • Dosages and desired drug concentration of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may vary depending on the particular use envisioned. The determination of the appropriate dosage or route of administration is well within the skill of an ordinary artisan. Animal experiments provide reliable guidance for the determination of effective does for human therapy. Interspecies scaling of effective doses can be performed following the principles laid down by Mordenti and Chappell, "The Use of Interspecies Scaling in Toxicokinetics," in Toxicokinetics and New Drug Development, Yacobi, et al, Eds., Pergamon Press, NY, p.4246 (1989).
  • normal dosage amounts may vary from about 1 ng/kg up to 100 mg/kg of mammal body weight or more per day, preferably about 1 pg/kg/day up to 100 mg/kg of mammal body weight or more per day, depending upon the route of administration.
  • Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature; see, for example, U.S. Patents 4,657,760, 5,206,344 or 5,225,212.
  • dosages may be administered by one or more separate administrations or by continuous infusion. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment is sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. However, other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
  • an article of manufacture containing materials useful for the diagnosis or treatment of the disorders described above comprises a container and a label.
  • Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials, syringes, and test tubes.
  • the containers may be formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.
  • the container holds a composition which is effective for diagnosing or treating the condition and may have a sterile access port (for example, the container may be an intravenous solution bag or a vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle).
  • the active agent in the composition is typically an LP polypeptide, antagonist or agonist thereof.
  • the label on, or associated with, the container indicates that the composition is used for diagnosing or treating the condition of choice.
  • the article of manufacture may further comprise a second container comprising a pharmaceutically-acceptable buffer, such as phosphate- buffered saline, Ringer's solution and dextrose solution. It may further include other materials desirable from a commercial and user standpoint, including other buffers, diluents, filters, needles, syringes, and package inserts with instructions for use.
  • therapeutic utility of the LP polypeptide is determined by measuring phosphorylation of tyrosine residues on specific cell lines.
  • the early cellular response of cells stimulated with the majority of proteins is protein phosphorylation of the tyrosine residues.
  • This response includes autophosphorylation of corresponding receptors, which thereby leads to the activation of catalytic properties and the initiation of intracellular pathways specific to the cell type.
  • signaling downstream of receptors requires phosphorylation of specific kinases inside the cell and other intracellular enzymes of different origin as well as the phosphorylation of multiple adapter/scaffold, structural proteins and transcriptional factors. Therefore, diverse protein-induced cell responses can be visualized by monitoring the state of protein phosphorylation after cell stimulation.
  • Immunodetection is used to detect the protein phosphorylation of the stimulated cell.
  • Several antibodies that are directed against specific phosphorylated epitopes in signaling molecules are readily available. Two specific antibodies are used: phosphospecific anti-MAPK and anti-AKT antibodies. Additionally, non-specific anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies, which recognize tyrosine-phosphorylated proteins, are used. While anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies allow detection of diverse tyrosine phosphorylated proteins without directly addressing the nature of their identity, the phosphospecific anti-MAPK and anti-AKT antibodies recognize only the corresponding proteins in their phosphorylated form.
  • LP polypeptides Another assay to determine utility of LP polypeptides involves transfection of cell lines with reporter plasmids followed by cell stimulation with an LP polypeptide.
  • Each reporter consists of a defined element, responsive to specific intracellular signaling pathways, upstream of a sequence involving a reporter protein such as luciferase.
  • reporter transcription and translation ensues, and the resulting protein levels can be detected using an assay such as a luminescence assay.
  • the cell stimulation period depends on the reporter plasmid used.
  • positive controls are designed in the form of agonist cocktails which include approximately maximal stimulatory doses of several ligands known to stimulate the represented signaling pathway. Using this design, the chances of finding a positive stimulus for each cell line is maximized.
  • some cell line / reporter combinations will not be stimulated by the specific agonist cocktail, due to lack of an appropriate ligand in the cocktail.
  • the lack of signal induction by an agonist cocktail may be the lack of all signaling components within a particular cell line to activate the transcriptional element. Cell line / reporter combinations with no exogenous stimulus added make up the negative controls.
  • LP polypeptides Another assay to determine utility of LP polypeptides involves transfection of cell lines with reporter plasmids followed by cell stimulation with an LP polypeptide.
  • Each reporter consists of a defined element, responsive to specific intracellular signaling pathways, upstream of a sequence involving a reporter protein such as luciferase.
  • reporter transcription and translation ensues, and the resulting protein levels can be detected using an assay such as a luminescence assay.
  • the cell stimulation period depends on the reporter plasmid used.
  • positive controls are designed in the form of agonist cocktails which include approximately maximal stimulatory doses of several ligands known to stimulate the represented signaling pathway. Using this design, the chances of finding a positive stimulus for each cell line is maximized. The caveat, however, is that some cell line/reporter combinations will not be stimulated by the specific agonist cocktail, due to lack of an appropriate ligand in the cocktail. Alternately, the lack of signal induction by an agonist cocktail may be the lack of all signaling components within a particular cell line to activate the transcriptional element. Cell line / reporter combinations with no exogenous stimulus added make up the negative controls.
  • LP polypeptide is determined by proliferation of cells.
  • gross changes in the number of cells remaining in a culture are monitored after exposure to an LP polypeptide for three days.
  • the cells are incubated in an appropriate assay medium to produce a sub-optimal growth rate.
  • an appropriate assay medium usually a 1 :10 or 1 :20 dilution of normal culture medium results in a 40 to 60% reduction in cell number compared to the undiluted culture medium.
  • This broad growth zone is chosen so that if an LP polypeptide is a stimulator of growth, the cells have room to expand, and conversely, if the LP polypeptide is deleterious, a reduction in cell density can be detected.
  • the assay media is replaced with media containing a detection agent such as Calcein AM, a membrane-permeant fluorescent dye, allowing quantification of the cell number.
  • a FLAG-HIS (FLIS)-tagged version of the LP polypeptide is expressed using mammalian cells such as HEK-293EBNA, COS-7, or HEK293T.
  • the coding region of the cDNA is amplified by PCR of a vector containing a fragment encoding the LP polypeptide.
  • the PCR-generated fragment is cleaved with restriction enzymes and gel-purified.
  • the fragment is then ligated into a mammalian expression vector containing the FLIS epitope tag fused to the C-terminus.
  • Protein expressed by this plasmid construct includes both the FLAG tag (Asp-Tyr-Lys-Asp-Asp- Asp-Asp-Lys) and the 6X His tag at the COOH -terminus of the protein. This tag provides epitopes for commercially available tag-specific antibodies, enabling detection of the protein.
  • a protein-binding assay is performed.
  • the fixed tissue sample is exposed to the FLIS-tagged LP polypeptide, followed by exposure to a primary antibody and a secondary antibody containing a fluorescent dye.
  • Tagged LP polypeptide that binds to the antigens in the tissue will fluoresce. Binding of the protein to an antigen in the tissue suggests that the protein is expressed in that tissue. Thus, protein expression can be determined by measuring which tissues fluoresce.
  • Example 1 Expression and Purification of LP polypeptides in E. coli
  • the bacterial expression vector pQE60 is used for bacterial expression in this example. (QIAGEN, Inc., Chatsworth, CA).
  • pQE60 encodes ampicillin antibiotic resistance ("Ampr") and contains a bacterial origin of replication ("ori"), an IPTG inducible promoter, a ribosome binding site (“RBS”), six codons encoding histidine residues that allow affinity purification using nickel-nitrilo-triacetic acid (“Ni-NTA”) affinity resin sold by QIAGEN, Inc., and suitable single restriction enzyme cleavage sites.
  • a DNA fragment encoding a polypeptide can be inserted in such a way as to produce that polypeptide with the six His residues (i.e., a "6 X His tag") covalently linked to the carboxyl terminus of that polypeptide.
  • a polypeptide coding sequence can optionally be inserted such that translation of the six His codons is prevented and, therefore, a polypeptide is produced with no 6 X His tag.
  • the nucleic acid sequence encoding the desired portion of an LP polypeptide lacking the hydrophobic leader sequence is amplified from a cDNA clone using PCR oligonucleotide primers (based on the sequences presented, e.g., in SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, or 9) which anneal to the amino terminal encoding DNA sequences of the desired portion of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid and to sequences in the construct 3' to the cDNA coding sequence. Additional nucleotides containing restriction sites to facilitate cloning in the pQE60 vector are added to the 5' and 3' sequences, respectively.
  • the 5' and 3' primers have nucleotides corresponding or complementary to a portion of the coding sequence of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid, e.g., as presented in SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to known method steps.
  • SEQ ID NO: 1 a portion of the coding sequence of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid
  • the point in a polynucleotide sequence where the 5' primer begins can be varied to amplify a desired portion of the complete polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide shorter or longer than the polynucleotide which encodes the mature form of the polypeptide.
  • the amplified nucleic acid fragments and the vector pQE60 are digested with appropriate restriction enzymes, and the digested DNAs are then ligated together.
  • Insertion of the LP polypeptide-encoding DNA into the restricted pQE60 vector places the LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, or LP401 polypeptide coding region including its associated stop codon downstream from the IPTG-inducible promoter and in-frame with an initiating AUG codon.
  • the associated stop codon prevents translation of the six histidine codons downstream of the insertion point.
  • E. coli strain M15/rep4 containing multiple copies of the plasmid pREP4, which expresses the lac repressor and confers kanamycin resistance ("Kanr"), is used in carrying out the illustrative example described herein.
  • This strain which is only one of many that are suitable for expressing LP polypeptides, is available commercially from QIAGEN, Inc. Transformants are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates in the presence of ampicillin and kanamycin.
  • Plasmid DNA is isolated from resistant colonies and the identity of the cloned DNA confirmed by restriction analysis, PCR and DNA sequencing.
  • Clones containing the desired constructs are grown overnight ("O/N") in liquid culture in LB media supplemented with both ampicillin (100 ⁇ g/mL) and kanamycin (25 ⁇ g/mL).
  • the O/N culture is used to inoculate a large culture, at a dilution of approximately 1 :25 to 1 :250.
  • the cells are grown to an optical density at 600 nm ("OD600”) of between 0.4 and 0.6.
  • IPTG Isopropyl-beta-D-thiogalactopyranoside
  • the cells are then stirred for three to four hours at 4 °C in 6 M guanidine hydrochloride, pH 8.
  • the cell debris is removed by centrifugation, and the supernatant containing the LP polypeptide is dialyzed against 50 mM sodium acetate buffer, pH 6, supplemented with 200 mM sodium chloride.
  • a polypeptide can be successfully refolded by dialyzing it against 500 mM sodium chloride, 20% glycerol, 25 mM Tris hydrochloride, pH 7.4, containing protease inhibitors.
  • the protein is made soluble according to known method steps. After renaturation, the polypeptide is purified by ion exchange, hydrophobic interaction, and size exclusion chromatography. Alternatively, an affinity chromatography step such as an antibody column is used to obtain pure LP polypeptide. The purified polypeptide is stored at 4 degrees C or frozen at negative 40 degrees C to negative 120 degrees C.
  • the plasmid shuttle vector pA2 GP is used to insert the cloned DNA encoding the mature LP polypeptide into a baculovirus, using a baculovirus leader and standard methods as described in Summers, et al, A Manual of Methods for Baculovirus Vectors and Insect Cell Culture Procedures, Texas Agricultural
  • This expression vector contains the strong polyhedrin promoter of the Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcMNPV) followed by the secretory signal peptide (leader) of the baculovirus gp67 polypeptide and convenient restriction sites such as BamHI, Xba I, and Asp718.
  • the polyadenylation site of the simian virus 40 ("SV40") is used for efficient polyadenylation.
  • the plasmid contains the beta-galactosidase gene from E. coli under control of a weak Drosophila promoter in the same orientation, followed by the polyadenylation signal of the polyhedrin gene.
  • the inserted genes are flanked on both sides by viral sequences for cell-mediated homologous recombination with wild-type viral DNA to generate viable virus that expresses the cloned polynucleotide.
  • baculovirus vectors are used in place of the vector above, such as pAc373, pVL941 and pAcIMl, as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion and the like, including a signal peptide and an in-frame AUG as required.
  • Such vectors are described, for instance, in Luckow, et al, Virology 170:31-39 (1989).
  • the cDNA sequence encoding the mature LP polypeptide in a clone, lacking the AUG initiation codon and the naturally associated nucleotide binding site, is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3' sequences of the gene.
  • Non-limiting examples include 5' and 3' primers having nucleotides corresponding or complementary to a portion of the coding sequence of an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, e.g., as presented in SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, or 9 according to known method steps.
  • the amplified fragment is isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit (e.g., "Geneclean,” BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, CA). The fragment is then digested with the appropriate restriction enzyme and again is purified on a 1% agarose gel. This fragment is designated herein "FI .”
  • the plasmid is digested with the corresponding restriction enzymes and optionally, can be dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase, using routine procedures known in the art.
  • the DNA is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean" BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, CA). This vector DNA is designated herein "VI.”
  • E. coli HB101 or other suitable E. coli hosts such as XL-1 Blue (Strata gene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, CA) cells are transformed with the ligation mixture and spread on culture plates.
  • Bacteria are identified that contain the plasmid bearing a human LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide using the PCR method, in which one of the primers that is used to amplify the gene and the second primer is from well within the vector so that only those bacterial colonies containing an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide will show amplification of the DNA.
  • the sequence of the cloned fragment is confirmed by DNA sequencing.
  • the resulting plasmid is designated herein as pBacLP.
  • plasmid pBacLP plasmid construct Five ⁇ g of the plasmid pBacLP plasmid construct is co-transfected with 1.0 ⁇ g of a commercially available linearized baculovirus DNA ("BaculoGold baculovirus DNA", PharMingen, San Diego, CA), using the lipofection method described by Feigner, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84: 7413-7 (1987). 1 ⁇ g of BaculoGold ® virus DNA and 5 ⁇ g of the plasmid pBacLP are mixed in a sterile well of a microtiter plate containing 50 ⁇ L of serum-free Grace's medium (Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD).
  • plaque assay After four days, the supernatant is collected, and a plaque assay is performed.
  • An agarose gel with "Blue Gal” (Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD) is used to allow easy identification and isolation of gal-expressing clones, which produce blue- stained plaques.
  • a detailed description of a "plaque assay” of this type can also be found in the user's guide for insect cell culture and baculovirology distributed by Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD, pp. 9-10). After appropriate incubation, blue stained plaques are picked with a micropipettor tip (e.g., Eppendorf).
  • the agar containing the recombinant viruses is then resuspended in a microcentrifuge tube containing 200 ⁇ L of Grace's medium and the suspension containing the recombinant baculovirus is used to infect Sf9 cells seeded in 35 mm dishes. Four days later, the supernatants of these culture dishes are harvested and then stored at 4 degrees C.
  • Sf9 cells are grown in Grace's medium supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated FBS. The cells are infected with the recombinant baculovirus at a multiplicity of infection ("MOI") of about two.
  • MOI multiplicity of infection
  • the medium is removed and replaced with SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine (available, e.g., from Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD). If radiolabeled polypeptides are desired, 42 hours later, 5 mCi of 35 S-methionine and 5 mCi 5 S-cysteine (available from Amersham, Piscataway, NJ) are added. The cells are further incubated for sixteen hours and then harvested by centrifugation. The polypeptides in the supernatant as well as the intracellular polypeptides are analyzed by SDS-PAGE, followed by autoradiography (if radiolabeled). Microsequencing of the amino acid sequence of the amino terminus of purified polypeptide can be used to determine the amino terminal sequence of the mature polypeptide and, thus, the cleavage point and length of the secretory signal peptide.
  • SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine available, e.g., from Life Technologies, Inc.,
  • a typical mammalian expression vector contains at least one promoter element, which mediates the initiation of transcription of mRNA, the polypeptide coding sequence, and signals required for the termination of transcription and polyadenylation of the transcript. Additional elements include enhancers, Kozak sequences and intervening sequences flanked by donor and acceptor sites for RNA splicing. Highly efficient transcription can be achieved with the early and late promoters from SV40, the long terminal repeats (LTRS) from Retroviruses, e.g., RSV, HTLVI, HIVI and the early promoter of the cytomegalovirus (CMV).
  • LTRS long terminal repeats
  • Suitable expression vectors for use in practicing the present invention include, for example, vectors such as pIRESlneo, pRetro-Off, pRetro- On, PLXSN, or pLNCX (Clontech Labs, Palo Alto, CA), pcDNA3.1 (+/-), pcDNA/Zeo (+/-) or pcDNA3.1/Hygro (+/-) (Invitrogen), PSVL and PMSG (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), pRSVcat (ATCC 37152), pSV2dhfr (ATCC 37146) and pBC12MI (ATCC 67109).
  • vectors such as pIRESlneo, pRetro-Off, pRetro- On, PLXSN, or pLNCX (Clontech Labs, Palo Alto, CA), pcDNA3.1 (+/-), pcDNA/Zeo (+/-) or pcDNA3.1/Hy
  • mammalian host cells include human Hela 293, H9, Jurkat cells, mouse NIH3T3, C127 cells, Cos 1, Cos 7 and CV 1 , quail QC1-3 cells, mouse L cells, and Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells.
  • the gene is expressed in stable cell lines that contain the gene integrated into a chromosome.
  • the co-transfection with a selectable marker such as DHRF (dihydrofolate reductase), GPT neomycin, or hygromycin allows the identification and isolation of the transfected cells.
  • DHRF dihydrofolate reductase
  • GPT neomycin hygromycin
  • the transfected gene can also be amplified to express large amounts of the encoded polypeptide.
  • the DHFR marker is useful to develop cell lines that carry several hundred or even several thousand copies of the gene of interest.
  • Another useful selection marker is the enzyme glutamine synthase (GS) [Murphy, et al, Biochem. J. 227:277-9 (1991); Bebbington, et al, Bio/Technology 10:169-75 (1992)]. Using these markers, the mammalian cells are grown in selective medium and the cells with the highest resistance are selected. These cell lines contain the amplified gene(s) integrated into a chromosome. Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and NSO cells are often used for the production of polypeptides.
  • CHO Chinese hamster ovary
  • NSO cells are often used for the production of polypeptides.
  • the expression vectors pCl and pC4 contain the strong promoter (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus [Cullen, et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:438-47 (1985)] plus a fragment of the CMV-enhancer [Boshart, et al, Cell 41 :521-30 (1985)].
  • LTR Rous Sarcoma Virus
  • CMV-enhancer e.g., CMV-enhancer
  • Multiple cloning sites e.g., with the restriction enzyme cleavage sites BamHI, Xbal, and Asp718, facilitate the cloning of the gene of interest.
  • the vectors contain in addition the 3' intron, the polyadenylation and te ⁇ nination signal of the rat preproinsulin gene.
  • the expression plasmid, pLP HA is made by cloning a cDNA encoding LP polypeptide into the expression vector pcDNAI/Amp or pcDNAIII (which can be obtained from Invitrogen, Inc.).
  • the expression vector pcDNAI/amp contains: (1) an E. coli origin of replication effective for propagation in E.
  • coli and other prokaryotic cells (2) an ampicillin resistance gene for selection of plasmid-containing prokaryotic cells; (3) an SV40 origin of replication for propagation in eukaryotic cells; (4) a CMV promoter, a polylinker, an SV40 intron; (5) several codons encoding a hemagglutinin fragment (i.e., an "HA" tag to facilitate purification) or HIS tag (see, e.g., Ausubel, supra) followed by a termination codon and polyadenylation signal arranged so that a cDNA can be conveniently placed under expression control of the CMV promoter and operably linked to the SV40 intron and the polyadenylation signal by means of restriction sites in the polylinker.
  • HA hemagglutinin fragment
  • HIS tag see, e.g., Ausubel, supra
  • the HA tag corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin polypeptide described by Wilson, et al, Cell 37:767-8 (1984).
  • the fusion of the HA tag to the target polypeptide allows easy detection and recovery of the recombinant polypeptide with an antibody that recognizes the HA epitope.
  • pcDNAIII contains, in addition, the selectable neomycin marker.
  • a DNA fragment encoding the LP polypeptide is cloned into the polylinker region of the vector so that recombinant polypeptide expression is directed by the CMV promoter.
  • the plasmid construction strategy is as follows.
  • the LP polypeptide-encoding cDNA of a clone is amplified using primers that contain convenient restriction sites, much as described above for construction of vectors for expression of LP polypeptides in E. coli.
  • suitable primers include those based on the coding sequences presented in S ⁇ Q ID NO: l, 3, 5, 7, or 9.
  • the PCR amplified DNA fragment and the vector, pcDNAI/Amp, are digested with suitable restriction enzyme(s) and then ligated.
  • the ligation mixture is transformed into E. coli strain SURE (available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, CA), and the transformed culture is plated on ampicillin media plates which then are incubated to allow growth of ampicillin resistant colonies. Plasmid DNA is isolated from resistant colonies and examined by restriction analysis or other means for the presence of the LP polypeptide-encoding fragment.
  • COS cells are transfected with an expression vector, as described above, using DEAE-DEXTRAN, as described, for instance, in Sambrook, et al, Molecular Cloning: a Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York (1989). Cells are incubated under conditions for expression of the LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide by the vector. Expression of the LP polypeptide-HA fusion is detected by radiolabeling and immunoprecipitation, using methods described in, for example Harlow, et al, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York (1988).
  • the cells are labeled by incubation in media containing 35 S-cysteine for eight hours.
  • the cells and the media are collected, and the cells are washed and lysed with detergent-containing RIPA buffer: 150 mM sodium chloride, 1% NP-40, 0.1% SDS, 0.5% DOC, 50 mM TRIS, pH 7.5, as described by Wilson, et al, cited above.
  • Proteins are precipitated from the cell lysate and from the culture media using an HA-specific monoclonal antibody.
  • the precipitated polypeptides then are analyzed by SDS-PAGE and autoradiography. An expression product of the expected size is seen in the cell lysate, which is not seen in negative controls.
  • Plasmid pC4 is a derivative of the plasmid pSV2-dhfr (ATCC Accession No. 37146).
  • the plasmid contains the mouse DHFR gene under control of the SV40 early promoter.
  • Chinese hamster ovary cells or other cells lacking dihydrofolate activity that are transfected with these plasmids can be selected by growing the cells in a selective medium (alpha minus MEM, Life Technologies) supplemented with methotrexate.
  • MTX methotrexate
  • Plasmid pC4 contains for expressing the gene of interest the strong promoter of the long terminal repeat (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus [Cullen, et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5: 438-47 (1985)] plus a fragment isolated from the enhancer of the immediate early gene of human cytomegalovirus (CMV) [Boshart, et al, Cell 41 : 521-30 (1985)]. Downstream of the promoter are BamHI, Xbal, and Asp718 restriction enzyme cleavage sites that allow integration of the genes. Behind these cloning sites, the plasmid contains the 3' intron and polyadenylation site of the rat preproinsulin gene.
  • LTR long terminal repeat
  • CMV cytomegalovirus
  • high efficiency promoters can also be used for the expression, e.g., the human beta-actin promoter, the SV40 early or late promoters or the long terminal repeats from other retroviruses, e.g., HIV and HTLVI.
  • Clontech's Tet-Off and Tet-On gene expression systems and similar systems can be used to express the LP polypeptide in a regulated way in mammalian cells [Gossen, and Bujard, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:5547-51 (1992)].
  • Other signals e.g., from the human growth hormone or globin genes can be used as well.
  • Stable cell lines carrying a gene of interest integrated into the chromosomes can also be selected upon co-transfection with a selectable marker such as gpt, G418 or hygromycin. It is advantageous to use more than one selectable marker in the beginning, e.g., G418 plus methotrexate.
  • the plasmid pC4 is digested with restriction enzymes and then dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase by procedures known in the art. The vector is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel.
  • the DNA sequence encoding the complete the LP polypeptide is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3' sequences of the gene.
  • Non- limiting examples include 5' and 3' primers having nucleotides corresponding or complementary to a portion of the coding sequences of an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, e.g., as presented in SEQ ID NO:l , 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to known method steps.
  • the amplified fragment is digested with suitable endonucleases and then purified again on a 1% agarose gel.
  • the isolated fragment and the dephosphorylated vector are then ligated with T4 DNA ligase.
  • coli HB101 or XL-1 Blue cells are then transformed and bacteria are identified that contain the fragment inserted into plasmid pC4 using, for instance, restriction enzyme analysis.
  • Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells lacking an active DHFR gene are used for transfection.
  • Five ⁇ g of the expression plasmid pC4 is cotransfected with 0.5 ⁇ g of the plasmid pSV2-neo using lipofectin.
  • the plasmid pSV2-neo contains a dominant selectable marker, the neo gene from Tn5 encoding an enzyme that confers resistance to a group of antibiotics including G418.
  • the cells are seeded in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 1 ⁇ g/mL G418.
  • the cells are trypsinized and seeded in hybridoma cloning plates (Greiner, Germany) in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 10, 25, or 50 ng/mL of methotrexate plus 1 ⁇ g/mL G418. After about ten to fourteen days, single clones are trypsinized and then seeded in six-well petri dishes or 10 mL flasks using different concentrations of methotrexate (50 nM, 100 nM, 200 nM, 400 nM, 800 nM).
  • Clones growing at the highest concentrations of methotrexate are then transferred to new six-well plates containing even higher concentrations of methotrexate (1 mM, 2 mM, 5 mM, 10 mM, 20 mM). The same procedure is repeated until clones are obtained which grow at a concentration of 100 to 200 mM.
  • Expression of the desired gene product is analyzed, for instance, by SDS-PAGE and Western blot or by reversed phase HPLC analysis.
  • Example 4 Tissue Distribution of LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA Northern blot analysis is carried out to examine expression of LP -polypeptide mRNA in human tissues, using methods described by, among others, Sambrook, et al, cited above.
  • a cDNA preferably probe encoding the entire LP polypeptide is labeled with 32 P using the RediprimeTM DNA labeling system (Amersham Life Science), according to the manufacturer's instructions. After labeling, the probe is purified using a CHROMA SPIN- 100TM column (Clontech Laboratories, Inc.) according to the manufacturer's protocol number PT1200-1. The purified and labeled probe is used to examine various human tissues for LP polypeptide mRNA.
  • MTN Multiple Tissue Northern
  • H human tissues
  • IM human immune system tissues
  • Protein-induced cell responses are determined by monitoring tyrosine phosphorylation upon stimulation of cells by addition of LP polypeptides. This is accomplished in two steps: cell manipulation and immunodetection.
  • Protein phosphorylation is measured using the SK-N-MC neuroblastoma cell line (ATCC HTB-10).
  • the cells are plated into poly-D-lysine-coated, 96 well plates containing cell propagation medium [DMEM:F12 (3:1), 20 mM HEPES at pH 7.5, 5% FBS, and 50 ⁇ g/mL Gentamicin].
  • the cells are seeded at a concentration of 20,000 cells per well in 100 ⁇ L medium.
  • the propagation medium in each well is replaced with 100 ⁇ L starvation medium containing DMEM:F12 (3:1), 20 mM HEPES at pH 7.5, 0.5%) FBS, and 50 ⁇ g/mL Gentamicin.
  • pervanadate is prepared by mixing 100 ⁇ L of sodium orthovanadate (100 mM) and 3.4 ⁇ L of hydrogen peroxide (producing 100X stock pervanadate solution).
  • the lysis buffer is then prepared: 50 mM HEPES at pH 7.5, 150 mM sodium chloride, 10% glycerol, 1% TRITON-X100TM, 1 mM EDTA, 1 mM pervanadate, and BM protease inhibitors.
  • the cells are stimulated by adding 10 ⁇ L of the LP polypeptide solution to the cells, and incubating for ten minutes.
  • the medium is aspirated, and 75 ⁇ L lysis buffer are added to each well.
  • the cells are lysed at 4 degrees C for fifteen minutes, then 25 ⁇ L of 4X loading buffer are added to the cell lysates.
  • the resultant solution is mixed then heated to 95 degrees C.
  • Detection of tyrosine phosphorylation is accomplished by Western immunoblotting. Twenty microliters of each cell sample are loaded onto SDS-PAGE eight to sixteen percent amino acid-ready gels from Bio-Rad, and the gels are run. The proteins are electrotransferred in transfer buffer (25 mM Tris base at pH 8.3, 0.2 M glycine, 20% methanol) from the gel to a nitrocellulose membrane using 250 mA per gel over a one hour period. The membrane is incubated for one hour at ambient conditions in blocking buffer consisting of TBST (20 mM Tris hydrochloride at pH 7.5, 150 mM sodium chloride, 0.1% TWEEN ® -20) with 1% BSA.
  • transfer buffer 25 mM Tris base at pH 8.3, 0.2 M glycine, 20% methanol
  • the antibodies are added to the membrane.
  • the membrane is incubated overnight at 4 degrees C with gentle rocking in primary antibody solution consisting of the antibody, TBST, and 1% BSA.
  • the next day the membrane is washed three times, five minutes per wash, with TBST.
  • the membrane is then incubated in the secondary antibody solution consisting of the antibody, TBST, and 1 % BSA for one hour at ambient conditions with gentle rocking. After the incubation, the membrane is washed four times with TBST, ten minutes per wash.
  • Detection is accomplished by incubating the membrane with 10 to 30 mL of SuperSignal Solution for one minute at ambient conditions. After one minute, excess developing solution is removed, and the membrane is wrapped in plastic wrap. The membrane is exposed to X-ray film for twenty second, one minute, and two minute exposures (or longer if needed). The number and intensity of immunostained protein bands are compared to bands for the negative control-stimulated cells (basal level of phosphorylation) by visual comparison.
  • Example 6 Cell Stimulation with Detection Utilizing Reporters Protein-induced cell responses are measured using reporters.
  • the SK-N-MC cell line (neuroblastoma; ATCC HTB-10) / NFKB reporter combination is used.
  • positive controls are designed in the form of agonist cocktails. These cocktails include approximate maximal stimulatory doses of several ligands known to stimulate the regulated signal pathway.
  • the NFKB reporter the NFKB / PkC pathway is stimulated by an agonist cocktail containing LPS and TNF-alpha as positive controls. Cell lines and reporters with no exogenous stimulus added are used as negative controls.
  • the cells are transiently transfected with the reporter plasmids in tissue culture flasks using a standard optimized protocol for all cell lines (see Example 1). After 24 hours, the cells are trypsinized and seeded into 96-well poly-D-lysine coated assay plates at a rate of 20,000 cells per well in growth medium. After four to five hours, the medium is replaced with serum-free growth medium. At that time, stimulants for those reporters which required a 24-hour stimulation period are added. After 48 hours, stimulants for the reporters which required a five-hour stimulation period are added. Five hours later, all conditions are lysed using a lysis/luciferin cocktail, and the fluorescence of the samples is determined using a Micro Beta reader.
  • Each assay plate is plated to contain four positive control wells, sixteen negative control wells, and sixty- four test sample wells (two replicates of thirty-two test samples).
  • the threshold value for a positive "hit” is a fluorescence signal equal to the mean plus two standard deviations of the negative control wells. Any test sample that, in both replicates, generates a signal above that threshold is defined as a "hit.”
  • Example 7 Cell Proliferation and Cytotoxicity Determination Utilizing Fluorescence Detection This assay is designed to monitor gross changes in the number of cells remaining in culture after exposure to LP polypeptides for a period of three days. The following cells are used in this assay:
  • cells Prior to assay, cells are incubated in an appropriate assay medium to produce a sub-optimal growth rate, e.g., a 1 :10 or 1 :20 dilution of normal culture medium.
  • a sub-optimal growth rate e.g., a 1 :10 or 1 :20 dilution of normal culture medium.
  • Cells are grown in T-l 50 flasks, then harvested by trypsin digestion and replated at 40 to 50% confluence into poly-D-lysine-treated 96-well plates. Cells are only plated into the inner thirty-two wells to prevent edge artifacts due to medium evaporation; the outer wells are filled with buffer alone.
  • LP polypeptides are added to the appropriate wells. Each polypeptide is assayed in triplicate at two different concentrations, IX and 0.1X dilution in assay medium. Two controls are also included on each assay plate: assay medium and normal growth medium.
  • the plates are processed to determine the number of viable cells. Plates are spun to increase the attachment of cells to the plate. The medium is then discarded, and 50 ⁇ L of detection buffer is added to each well.
  • the detection buffer consisted on MEM medium containing no phenol red (Gibco) with calcein AM (Molecular Probes) and PLURONIC ® F-127 (Molecular Probes), each at a 1 :2000 dilution. After incubating the plates in the dark at room temperature for thirty minutes, the fluorescence intensity of each well is measured using a Cytofluor 4000-plate reader (PerSeptive Biosystems). For a given cell type, the larger the fluorescence intensity, the greater the number of cells in the well.

Abstract

The present invention provides nucleic acid sequences encoding novel human proteins. These novel nucleic acids are useful for constructing the claimed DNA vectors and host cells of the invention and for preparing the claimed nucleic acids, recombinant proteins and antibodies that are useful in the claimed methods and medical uses.

Description

NOVEL SECRETED PROTEINS AND THEIR USES
FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to the identification and isolation of novel DNA, therapeutic and drug discovery uses, and the recombinant production of novel secreted polypeptides, designated herein as LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, and LP401. The present invention also relates to vectors, host cells, and antibodies directed to these polypeptides. IL-lβ BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Extracellular proteins play an important role in the formation, differentiation and maintenance of multi-cellular organisms. The fate of many individual cells, e.g., proliferation, migration, differentiation, or interaction with other cells, is typically governed by information received from other cells and/or the immediate environment. This information is often transmitted by secreted polypeptides (for instance, mitogenic factors, survival factors, cytotoxic factors, differentiation factors, neuropeptides, and hormones) which are, in turn, received and interpreted by diverse cell receptors or membrane-bound proteins. These secreted polypeptides or signaling molecules normally pass through the cellular secretory pathway to reach their site of action in the extracellular environment.
Secreted proteins have various industrial applications, including pharmaceuticals, diagnostics, biosensors and bioreactors. Most protein drugs available at present such as thrombolytic agents, interferons, interleukins, erythropoietins, colony stimulating factors, and various other cytokines are secretory proteins. Their receptors, which are membrane proteins, also have potential as therapeutic or diagnostic agents. The discovery of novel proteins and the polynucleotides that encode them satisfies a need in the art by providing new compositions that are useful in the diagnosis, prevention, and/or treatment of medical diseases, disorders, and/or conditions, and in the assessment of the effects of exogenous compounds on the expression of nucleic acid and amino acid sequences of proteins.
The present invention describes the cloning and characterization of novel proteins, termed LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, and LP401 as well as active variants and/or fragments thereof.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides isolated LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, and LP401 polypeptide encoding nucleic acids and the polypeptides encoded thereby, including fragments and/or specified variants thereof. Contemplated by the present invention are LP probes, primers, recombinant vectors, host cells, transgenic animals, chimeric antibodies and constructs, LP polypeptide antibodies, as well as methods of making and using them diagnostically and therapeutically as described and enabled herein.
The present invention includes isolated nucleic acid molecules comprising polynucleotides that encode LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, and LP401 polypeptides as defined herein, as well as fragments and/or specified variants thereof, or isolated nucleic acid molecules that are complementary to polynucleotides that encode such LP polypeptides, or fragments and/or specified variants thereof as defined herein.
A polypeptide of the present invention includes an isolated LP polypeptide comprising at least one fragment, domain, or specified variant of at least 90-100% of the contiguous amino acids of at least one portion of SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
The present invention also provides an isolated LP polypeptide as described herein, wherein the polypeptide further comprises at least one specified substitution, insertion, or deletion corresponding to portions or specific residues of SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10. The present invention also provides an isolated nucleic acid probe, primer, or fragment, as described herein, wherein the nucleic acid comprises a polynucleotide of at least 10 nucleotides, corresponding or complementary to at least 10 nucleotides of SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3, 5, 7, or 9.
The present invention also provides compositions, including pharmaceutical compositions, comprising an LP polypeptide, an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, an LP polynucleotide, and/or an LP polypeptide antibody, wherein the composition has a measurable effect on an activity associated with a particular LP polypeptide as disclosed herein. A method of treatment or prophylaxis based on an LP polypeptide associated activity as disclosed herein can be effected by administration of one or more of the polypeptides, nucleic acids, antibodies, vectors, host cells, transgenic cells, and/or compositions described herein to a mammal in need of such treatment or prophylactic. Accordingly, the present invention also includes methods for the prophylaxis or treatment of a patho-physiological condition in which at least one cell type involved in said condition is sensitive or responsive to an LP polypeptide, LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, LP nucleic acid, LP polypeptide antibody, host cell, transgenic cell, and/or composition of the present invention.
The present invention also provides an article of manufacture comprising a container, holding a composition effective for treating a condition disclosed herein, and a label.
The present invention also provides a method for identifying compounds that bind an LP polypeptide, comprising: a) admixing at least one isolated LP polypeptide as described herein with a test compound or composition; and b) detecting at least one binding interaction between the polypeptide and the compound or composition, optionally further comprising detecting a change in biological activity, such as a reduction or increase.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
Applicants have identified cDNA clones comprising polynucleotides that encode novel polypeptides or novel variants of known polypeptides: 1) LP359 and LP364
LP359 polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:l are contemplated as one embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP359 polynucleotides encoding the LP359 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
Sequence analysis of LP359 indicates that it is a secreted protein possessing a signal peptide in the N terminal 31 amino acids of the full-length protein. The mature protein is approximately 206 amino acids in length (from about amino acid 32 to amino acid 237 of SEQ ID NO:2).
LP364 polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:3 are contemplated as another embodiment of the present invention. Specifically, polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:4, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP364 polynucleotides encoding the LP364 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention. Sequence analysis of LP364 indicates that it is a secreted protein possessing a signal peptide in the first 15 amino acids of the full-length protein. The mature protein is approximately 318 amino acids in length (from about amino acid 16 to amino acid 333 of SED ID NO:4).
LP359 (SEQ ID NO: 2) and LP364 (SEQ ID NO:4) are novel secreted polypeptides that exhibit amino acid sequence similarity and/or identity and domain architecture to the Clq family of proteins. These proteins are generally characterized as comprising collagenous helical structures at their amino portions and a globular domain at their carboxy portions [see, e.g., Prockop and Kivirikko, Ann. Rev. Biochem 64:403-434 (1995)]. Examples of members of this family include: the Clq A, B, and C chains of the complement Clq complex; collagen alpha 1(X); lung surfacant proteins SP-A and SP-D; mannan binding protein; hibernation proteins HP-20, HP-25, and HP-27; AdipoQ/AC P30; and cerebellins. The sequence characteristics of LP359 and LP364 suggest that these polypeptides are members of this protein family.
Clq is a subunit of the CI enzyme complex that activates the serum complement system. Clq is composed of nine disulfide-linked dimers of A, B, and C chains that share two structural regions that are well-conserved among the Clq family of proteins. One region is a collagen-like region in the amino portion of the protein. The other region is an aromatic zipper or globular portion (the Clq globular domain) and is located in the carboxy portion of the protein.
The collagen-like amino portion of the proteins in the Clq family consist of multiple copies (typically of 10-30) of repeated Gly-Xaa-Yaa motifs. The second (Xaa) and third (Yaa) positions can be any residue but are frequently proline and hydroxyproline [Mayne and Brewton, Curr Opin Cell Biol 5:883-890 (1993)]. Characteristically, such Gly-Xaa-Yaa repeats are predicted to form collagen-like triple helices via multimerization with other proteins, thereby yielding protein structures typically comprised of hetero- or homotrimeric subunits. For example, in CI q, collagenlike domains containing Gly-Xaa-Yaa repeats in the Cl q A, B, and C polypeptides form heterotrimeric, helical collagen-like structures that are held together by both covalent and non-covalent bonds.
LP359 and LP364 each share sequence similarity to the Clq family collagen-like amino region. In LP359, this region is from about amino acid 34 to about amino acid 87 of SEQ ID NO:2. In LP364, the collagen-like amino region consists of three domains containing Gly-Xaa-Yaa motifs, where the domains are from about amino acid 27 to about amino acid 202 of SEQ ID NO:4. The similarity of these regions of LP359 and LP364 to the collagen-like amino regions of Clq family proteins suggest that LP359 and LP364 each may form collagen-like multimers.
The Clq-like globular domain is found in the C-terminal ends of secreted (or membrane-bound) vertebrate proteins, which, typically, are short-chain collagens and/or collagen-like molecules [Smith, et al. Biochem. J. 301 :249-256 (1994); Brass, et al. 1992 FEBS Lett. 303:126-128 (1992); Perry, et al. ur. J. Biochem. 209:129-134 (1992)]. In the Clq protein, the globular domain consists of about 136 amino acids that form ten beta strands interspersed by beta-turns and/or loops (Smith, et al. 1994 Biochem. J. 301 :249- 256). Using the Clq globular domain portion, a consensus recognition pattern was developed (F-x(5)-[ND]-x(4)-[FYWL]-x(6)-F-x(5)-G-x-Y-x-F-x-[FY]) to identify proteins exhibiting a Clq domain signature. Every protein sequence in the SWISS-PROT database that is recognized as having a Clq domain can be identified using this consensus signature. The C-terminal globular domain of the Cl q subcomponents and of collagen type proteins such as collagen VIII and collagen X is important both for the correct folding and alignment of the triple helix and for protein-protein recognition events [Rosenbloom, et al., J. Biol. Chem. 251 :2070-2076 (1976); Engel and Prockop 1991 Annu. Rev. Biophys. Chem. 20:137-152 (1991)].
In their carboxy-portions, LP359 and LP364 each exhibit a Clq globular domain. In LP359, this domain is from about amino acid 97 to about amino acid 221 of SEQ ID NO:2. In LP364, the CI q globular domain is from about amino acid 203 to about amino acid 329 of SEQ ID NO:4. Clq is part of the classical pathway of the complement component of the immune system. Clq interacts with aggregated IgGs via its globular domains and initiates complement cascade by proteolytically activating factors C2 and C4. Given the similarity of LP359 and LP364 to the ClqB-chain and the possession by LP359 and LP364 of both collagenous-like and globular-like domains, an LP359 or LP364 as described herein is also likely to participate in complement-mediated processes or in complement-related diseases, conditions, and/or syndromes.
A crystal structure of the Clq signature domain of a member of the Clq protein family, ACRP30, has been determined [Shapiro and Scherer, Curr. Bio. 8:335-338 (1998)]. The three-dimensional structure of ACRP30, is superimposable onto the three- dimensional structure of tumor necrosis factor proteins (TNFs) as they display similar ten-strand jelly-roll fold topology [Shapiro and Scherer, Current Biology 8:335-338 (1997)]. This topology similarity occurs in spite of these sequences having overall low sequence similarity, as TNF-alpha has few amino acid residues that would be classified as characteristic of a Clq signature domain. However, a sequence comparison of ACRP30, Clq A, TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, and CD40L (informed by the superimposability of the three-dimensional structures of these proteins) reveals that four key amino acid residues are conserved throughout both the Clq and TNF families. In ACRP30, these four conserved amino acids are Glyl59, Tyrlόl , Phe237, and Leu242. Each of the key conserved amino acid residues is important in contributing to the mature three- dimensional characteristics of these proteins [Shapiro and Scherer, Curr. Bio. 8:335-338 (1998)]. Analysis of such data support a conclusion that the TNF and Clq domain group of proteins define a family termed the Complement C 1 q/Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF) family.
The amino acid sequences of LP359 and LP364 indicate that these polypeptides possess structural topology similar to that of the superimposable higher-order structural topology shared between TNFs and ACRP30. The four key amino acid residues conserved between TNF-alpha, TNF-beta, CD40L, ACRP30 appear to be present in LP359 and LP364. In LP359, these corresponding residues are found at amino acid Gly 139, Tyrl41 , Phe216, and Leu221 of SEQ ID NO:2. In LP364, these corresponding conserved residues are found at amino acid Gly247, Tyr249, Phe324, and Leu329 of SEQ ID NO:4. Therefore, it is likely that LP359 and LP364 are also members of the Clq/TNF superfamily and possesses a similar folding topology with ten beta-strand jelly-roll features. Consequently, it is also likely that secreted LP359 or LP364 (or portions thereof), or a LP359 or LP364 complex interacts with a membrane receptor to activate an intracellular signal transduction cascade in a manner analogous to TNF alpha.
Like many complement proteins, TNF alpha is produced in response to infection and plays a variety of roles, such as for example, in: inflammation, cell proliferation, cell death, immunity, and energy homeostasis, where it is implicated in cachexia, obesity, and insulin resistance [Hotamisligil and Spiegelman, Diabetes 43:1271-1278 (1994); Uysal, et al, Nature 389:610-614 (1997)]. TNF alpha also regulates the expression levels of some downstream components of the complement system. TNF alpha is also a major secretory product of adipocytes. Similar activities have been observed for Clq family proteins such as ACRP30 and Hib27. Given the presence of the key conserved amino acid residues between LP359, LP364, ACRP30, and TNFs, LP359 and LP364 also may be members of the Complement Clq/Tumor Necrosis Factor (TNF) family with similar functionalities due to the possession of a similarly conserved higher-order structural topology.
Based on northern blot analysis with commercially available human tissue RNA blots, LP359 is expressed in heart. The expression of LP359 in heart indicates that it may be associated with cardiovascular disease, and therefore prove beneficial as a therapeutic or therapeutic target. Given the relationship of LP359 amino acid sequence and putative structural features to known Clq family proteins, it is likely that LP359, an LP359 variant, an LP359 agonist, an LP359 antagonist, an LP359 binding partner, or an LP359 fragment plays a role in physiological processes involved with complement activation and/or modulation of various diseases, condition or syndromes associated with complement activation. Modulation of LP359 may therefore prove beneficial in treating several diseases and conditions, including but not limited to, cardiovascular disease, obesity, diabetes, high blood pressure, and inflammation.
The LP364 polypeptide is highly expressed in prostate, as determined by northern blot analysis with human tissue RNA blots. LP364 may therefore be useful for treatment of prostate cancer or as an inhibition target for prostate cancer. The relationship of LP364 amino acid sequence to CI q family protein structures indicates that LP364, an LP364 variant, and LP364 agonist, an LP364 antagonist, an LP364 binding partner or an LP364 fragment may be involved with numerous physiological processes associated with modulation of complement activation and/or modulation of various diseases and conditions associated with complement activation. LP364 therefore may have a role in prostate cancer through the modulation of various processes including, but not limited to, tumorgenesis, cellular metastatis, cell proliferation, and cell homeostasis. Consequently, administration or targeting of LP364 may prove useful in treating prostate cancer. In addition, LP364 may be a therapeutic or therapeutic target in other complement associated diseases, including but not limited to, obesity, diabetes, osteoarthritis, vascular, and/or neurodegenerative diseases.
2) LP381
In another embodiment, polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:5 are contemplated by the present invention. Specifically, LP381 polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:6, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP381 polynucleotides encoding LP381 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
LP381 is expressed in human lymph node tissue, based on identification of the DNA encoding LP381 polypeptide from a clone obtained by PCR amplification of human lymph node cDNA (Clontech, Palo Alto, CA). Sequence analysis of the LP381 polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO:6 indicates that it is a shortened splice-variant of interleukin 2 (IL-2), which has been cloned from a human cDNA library [Taniguchi et al., Nature 302:305-10 (1983)]. In eukaryotic cells, IL-2 is synthesized as a precursor polypeptide of 153 amino acids, from which 20 amino acids are removed to generate mature secreted IL-2. Sequence analysis using the SPScan program [Nielsen et al., Protein Engineering 10:1-6 (1997)] indicates that LP381, like IL-2, has a signal peptide of 20 amino acids. The mature LP381 is therefore approximately 113 amino acids in length (from about amino acid 21 to amino acid 133 of SEQ ID NO:6). The mRNA processing of LP381 produces an mRNA that lacks the second exon of IL-2 mRNA, which correspondingly yields an LP381 polypeptide that contains a 20 amino acid deletion in comparison to the native IL-2 polypeptide. The amino acids missing in this deletion correspond to amino acids 50-69 of mature IL-2 polypeptide, in which the amino acids remaining after removal of the signal peptide are numbered 1-133. Despite the absence of exon 2, the cysteine residues at positions 58 and 105 of mature IL-2 polypeptide (corresponding to amino acids 58 and 105 of LP381 as shown in SEQ ID NO:6) suggested by Ciardelli et al. to be necessary for full biological activity are present [Ciardelli et al., in Immune Regulation by Characterized Polypeptides, Goldstein, Bach, Wigzell, Eds. (Liss, New York, 1987), pp. 315-322].
IL-2 is a soluble protein and is produced from T cells activated with a lectin or an antigen [Morgan et al., Science 193:1007-1008 (1976), Gillis et al., J. Immunol., 120:2027-2033 (1978)]. IL-2 is capable of modulating lymphocyte reactivity and promoting the in vitro long-term culture of antigen specific effector T-lymphocytes [Gillis et al., Nature 268: 154-156 (1977)]. IL-2 is also known to manifest other relevant biological activities such as enhancement of thymocyte mitogenesis [Chen et al., Cell. Immunol. 22:21 1-224 (1977), Shaw et al., J. Immunol. 120:1967-1973 (1978)], induction of cytotoxic T cell reactivity (Wagner et al., Nature 284:278-280 (1980)]. IL-2 has also been shown to modulate various other immune functions, including exerting effects on cytotoxic T cells [Gillis et al, J Immunol. 124:1954-62 (1980)], natural killer cells [Ortaldo et al., J. Immunol. 133:779-83 (1984], activated B cells [Mingari et al, Nature 312:641-3 (1984)] and lymphokine activated killer (LAK) cells [Grimm et al, J Exp Med. 155:1823-41 (1982); Mazumder and Rosenberg, J Exp Med. 159:495-507 (1984)].
Accordingly, this lymphocyte regulatory substance is useful in potentiating humoral and cellular immune responses and in restoring immune deficient state to a normal humoral and cellular immune state.
The identified immunological activities of IL-2 strongly indicate that IL-2 is useful for medical immunotherapy against immunological disorders including neoplastic diseases, bacterial or viral infections, immune deficient diseases, autoimmune diseases, and conditions related thereto. This naturally occurring lymphokine has been shown to have antitumor activity against a variety of malignancies either alone or when combined with leukotriene-activated killer (LAK) cells or tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes [see, for example, Rosenberg et al, N. Engl. J Med. 319: 1676-1680 (1988) and Weber et al, J. Clin. Oncol. 10:33-40 (1992)]. The anti-tumor activity of IL-2 has been well described in patients with metastatic melanoma and renal cell carcinoma [see, for example, MacFarlane et al, Cancer 75:1030-7 (1995)]. Other indications for treatment with IL-2 include, but are not limited to, leukemia [Goodman et al, Leukemia 12:1682-4 (1998)], melanoma [Chang and Rosenberg, J. Immunother. 24:88-90 (2000)], non-Hodgkin lymphoma [van Besien et al, Cancer J. Sci. Am. Suppl l :S54-8 (1999)], lung cancer [Clamon et al, Lung Cancer 1998 19:25-(1998)]; ovarian cancer [Santin et al, Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol 174:633-40 (1996)], and HIN infection [Piscitelli et al, Drug Saf. 22:19-31 (2000)].
While the administration of IL-2 has proven to be beneficial in cancer therapy, the clinical usefulness of IL-2 immunotherapy is currently limited due to problems of marked toxicity. LP381 may prove beneficial as an IL-2 variant which has reduced toxicity towards human cells, thereby leading to the development of more effective methods of clinical immunotherapy.
Sequence encoding LP381 has been localized to human chromosome region 4q26-q27. Moreover, the following diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states have also been mapped to this region of the human genome: severe combined immunodeficiency due to a specific defect in the production of interleukin-2 [Weinberg and Parkman, N. Engl J. Med. 322:1718-23 (1990)], fibrodysplasia ossificans progressiva [Feldmen et al, Am. J. Hum. Genet. 66:128-135 (2000)], long QT syndrome- 4 with sinus bradycardia [Schott et al, Am. J Hum. Genet. 57:1114-1122 (1995)], Rieger syndrome [Flomen et al, J. Med. Genet. 34:191-5 (1997)], and iris hypoplasia [Alward et al, Am. J. Ophthal 125: 98-100 (1998)]. Accordingly, an isolated and/or recombinant molecule comprising LP381 nucleic acid sequence can be used, for example, to hybridize near a nucleic acid sequence associated with one or more of the above stated diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states and thus serve as a marker for such a disease gene.
3) LP400
In another embodiment, polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:7 are contemplated by the present invention. Specifically, LP400 polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:8, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP400 polynucleotides encoding LP400 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
LP400 is expressed in leukocytes, based on cloning of DNA encoding LP400 polypeptide from a leukocyte cDNA library. The LP400 polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO:7 is a shortened splice-variant of interleukin-1 beta (IL-lβ). In the mRNA processing of LP400, alternative splicing produces an mRNA that lacks exons 1 and 5 of IL-l β mRNA, where exon 1 resides in the 5 '-untranslated region of the IL-lβ mRNA. In addition, the last exon of LP400 mRNA is truncated compared to exon 7 of IL-1 β mRNA, to yield a shortened (from the 3' end) 3 '-untranslated region in LP400 mRNA compared to that of IL-1 β mRNA.
The LP400 mRNA correspondingly yields an LP400 polypeptide that contains a 56 amino acid deletion in comparison to the native IL-lβ polypeptide, such that LP400 polypeptide does not contain amino acids 100-155 of IL-lβ precursor polypeptide. Human IL-lβ is synthesized as a 269 amino acid long precursor polypeptide (proIL-lβ), and is cleaved into a 116 amino acid pro-segment and a 153 amino acid mature segment [Thornberry et al, Nature 356:768 (1992)]. Cleavage of IL-lβ is suggested to be carried out by a protease named IL-lβ-converting enzyme (ICE) [Thornberry et al, Nature 356:768 (1992)]. Generally, mature IL-lβ is secreted and proIL-l β accumulates mostly inside the cell, but proIL-lβ is also found outside the cell [Thornberry et al, Nature 356:768 (1992)]. IL-1 β is part of the IL-1 cellular signaling pathway that plays a crucial role in the mammalian inflammatory response and is associated with a wide range of immunologic, metabolic, physiological and hematopoietic activities. The IL-1 family includes three structurally related cytokines: IL-1 alpha, IL-lβ and IL-1 receptor antagonist [Dinarello, Blood 87:2095 (1996)]. IL-1 β is a proinflammatory agonist that binds with high affinity to both the type I and type II IL-1 receptors, with the known biological functions of IL-lβ being mediated through the type I IL-1 receptor. The type II IL-1R has a severely truncated cytoplasmic domain and upon binding to IL-1 does not transduce signal to a cell, but instead is involved in regulating an IL-1 -mediated response by acting as a decoy receptor [Colotta et al, Immunol. Today 15:562 (1994)].
IL-lβ is released by macrophages and certain other cell types in response to infections, microbial toxins, inflammatory agents, allergic reactions and similar stimuli which initiate host response to injury and infection. IL-lβ largely functions to regulate the amplitude and duration of the immune and inflammatory response at the sites of inflammation or allergic immune reaction. When excess IL-lβ is produced or IL-lβ expression is not appropriately regulated disease states can develop. Accordingly, IL-lβ has been implicated in a variety of inflammatory and immunoregulatory diseases and conditions, such as rheumatoid arthritis and lupus [Martel-Pelletier et al, Front. Biosci. 4:D694-703 (1999)]. IL-lβ has also been implicated in wound healing [Garg et al, Biochem Mol Biol Int. 31 :583-91 (1993)]. In addition, IL-lβ has been associated with bone formation and remodeling [Kusano et al, Endocrinol 139:1338 (1998)], insulin secretion [Ling et al, Endocrinol. 139:1540 (1998)], appetite regulation [Plata-Salaman, Physiol Behav. 55:727 (1994)], fever induction [Hansen et al, J. Neurosci. 18:2247 (1998)], neuronal phenotype development [Ling et al, Exp. Neurol 149:411 (1998)], and insulin growth factor/growth hormone physiology [Fan et al, Am. J. Physiol. 270:R621 (1996); Delhanty, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 243:269 (1998)].
The expression of LP400 in leukocytes indicates that LP400 polypeptide may be useful as a therapeutic or therapeutic target in the treatment of medical disorders associated with IL-lβ, including, but not limited to those mentioned above, such as IL-lβ mediated inflammatory reactions and IL-1 β mediated immunoregulatory reactions.
In addition to providing a therapeutic or therapeutic target, LP400 polypeptide may prove useful as an adjuvant, in which LP400 would provide enhancement or modulation of the response of a subject's immune system to an antigen. For example, IL-1 and other cytokines may be useful as adjuvants with vaccines to protect against infectious diseases [Lin et al, Clin. Infect. Diseases 21 :1439 (1995)].
Sequence encoding LP400 has been localized to human chromosome region 2ql4. Moreover, the following diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states have also been mapped to this region of the human genome: colorectal cancer with chromosomal instability [Cahill et al, Nature 392: 300-303 (1998); Cahill et al, Genomics 58:181-187 (1999)], distal hereditary motor neuronopathy Nil [McEntagart et al, Am. J Hum. Genet. 68:1270-1276 (2001)], autosomal dominant dilated cardiomyopathy [Jung et al., Am. J. Hum. Genet. 65:1068-1077 (1999)], hepatocellular carcinoma [Tokino et al, Cytogenet. Cell Genet. 48: 63-64 (1988)], thrombophilia due to protein C deficiency, congenital thrombotic disease due to protein c deficiency [Patracchini et al, Hum. Genet. 81 :191-192 (1989)], and congenital hypothyroidism [Stapleton et al, Nature Genet. 3: 292-298 (1993); Macchia et al, Nature Genet. 19:83- 86 (1998)]. Accordingly, an isolated and/or recombinant molecule comprising LP400 nucleic acid sequence can be used, for example, to hybridize near a nucleic acid sequence associated with one or more of the above stated diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states and thus serve as a marker for such a disease gene.
4) LP401
In another embodiment, polypeptides comprising the amino acid sequence of the open reading frame encoded by the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID ΝO:9 are contemplated by the present invention. Specifically, LP401 polypeptides of the present invention comprise the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO: 10, as well as fragments, variants, and derivatives thereof. Accordingly, LP401 polynucleotides encoding LP401 polypeptides of the present invention are also contemplated by the present invention.
LP401 is expressed in leukocyte tissue, based on identification of the DNA encoding LP401 polypeptide from a clone obtained by PCR amplification of a leukocyte cDNA library. The LP401 polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO: 10 is a shortened splice- variant of interleukin-10 (IL-10). In the mRNA processing of LP401, alternative splicing produces an mRNA that lacks exon 3 of IL-10 mRNA. The LP401 mRNA correspondingly yields an LP401 polypeptide that is 127 amino acids in length. The LP401 polypeptide thereby contains a 51 amino acid deletion in comparison to the native IL-10 polypeptide, which is produced as a 178 amino acid polypeptide. The LP401 polypeptide therefore contains two nonapeptide domains (amino acids 26-34 and 119- 127 of SEQ ID NO : 10) that have been suggested to be responsible for particular IL-10 biological functions, including cytokine synthesis inhibitory properties and regulation of mast cell proliferation [Gesser et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94: 14620-14625 (1997)]. The 178 amino acid IL-10 polypeptide includes an 18 amino acid signal peptide, which is cleaved to yield a mature IL- 10 polypeptide of 160 amino acids. Based on its amino terminal similarity to IL-10, LP401 polypeptide is also predicted to be a secreted protein, wherein the first 18 amino acids of the nascent polypeptide are a signal peptide. The mature LP401 protein is correspondingly approximately 109 amino acids in length, from about amino acid 19 to amino acid 127 of SEQ ID NO: 10. IL-10 is a multifunctional cytokine that modulates a variety of functions of hemopoietic cells. IL-10 was initially recognized for its ability to inhibit activation and effector function of T cells, monocytes, and macrophages [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol 19:683-765 (2001)]. The primary role of IL-10 is apparently in the regulation of inflammation, as IL-10 serves to both limit and eventually terminate inflammatory responses. IL-10 also plays a role in the regulation of growth and/or differentiation of a number of cell types, including B cells, NK cells, cytotoxic and helper T cells, mast cells, granulocytes, dendritic cells, keratinocytes, endothelial cells, and T regulatory cells. Human IL-10 has closely related homologs in several organisms, such as mouse [Moore et al, Science 248:1230-1234 (1990)], rat [Goodman et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 189:1-7 (1992)], and several species of monkey [Moore et al, Ann. Rev.
Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)]. In addition, there are viral IL-10 homologs, such as that found encoded by Epstein-Barr virus which has 84% amino acid identity to the human IL-10 [Moore et al, Science 248:1230-1234 (1990)]. The expression of viral homologs of IL-10 is consistent with its primary role in regulating immune and inflammatory responses.
IL-10 is expressed by a variety of cells, including T cells, monocytes and macrophages in response to various activation stimuli [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)]. IL-10 exerts it effects in large part through modulating the expression of various effector molecules by cells of myeloid origin. For example, IL-10 inhibits the production of a number of cytokines by monocytes and macrophages, including IL-1 alpha, IL-1 beta, IL-6, IL-10, IL-12, IL-18, GM-CSF, G-CSF, M-CSF, TNF, LIP and PAF [de Waal et al, J. Exp. Med. 174:1209-1220 (1991); Fiorentino et al, J. Immunol. 147:3815-22 (1991)]. Monocyte expression of CC type chemokines (MCP1 , MCP-5, Mip-1 alpha, Mip-1 beta, Mip-3 alpha, Mip-3 beta, Rantes, MDC) as well as CXC type chemokines (IL-8, IP- 10, MIP-2, KC) is also inhibited by IL-10 [Kopydlowski et al, J. Immunol. 163:1537-44 (1999); Rossi et al, J. Immunol. 158:1033-36 (1997)]. IL- 10 therefore inhibits the production of several cytokines, chemokines and related molecules that are involved in inflammation.
The ability of IL-10 to inhibit expression of molecules involved in inflammation indicates that it will be useful as a therapeutic agent or therapeutic target for inflammation that is associated with many types of diseases or conditions. IL-10 has been indicated to be useful in treating inflammation associated with various conditions, including those giving rise to systemic or local inflammation, infectious diseases, autoimmune diseases, allergic responses, intestinal immune regulation, cancer, and graft reception.
A cascade of cellular events including pro-inflammatory cytokine production is involved in systemic inflammation, which can occur following septicemia, endotoxemia, severe trauma, burn, or ischemia-reperfusion injuries stimuli [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)]. IL-10 administration has been shown be protective against experimental endotoxemia in animal studies with mice and baboons as well as in studies with humans [Gerard et al, J. Exp. Med. 177:547-50 (193); van der Poll et al, J. Immunol. 158:1971-75 (1997); Pajkrt et al, J. Immunol. 158:3971-77 (1997)]. This protection correlated with a reduction in serum levels of TNF, which plays a central role in the inflammatory response. IL-10 has also shown efficacy in treating animal models of burn and ischemia reperfusion [Engles et al, J. Surg. Res. 69:425-28 (1997); Lyons et al, Arch. Surg. 134:1317-24 (1999)]. Furthermore, IL-10 has been shown to have protective effects in many models of local inflammation, including pancreatis, uveitis, keratitis, hepatitis, peritonitis, lung injury, and brain or spinal cord injury [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)]. The anti-inflammatory effects of IL-10 have been suggested to be protective against autoimmunity. For example, administration of IL-10 has been shown to reduce joint swelling, cytokine production, and cartilage degradation in models of rheumatoid arthritis [van Roon et al, Arthritis Rheum. 39:495-503 (1996); Joosten et al, Arthritis Rheum. 40:249-60 (1997)]. Alternatively, inhibition of IL-10 may be protective in certain conditions of autoimmunity. IL-10 stimulation of immunoglobulin production by B cells has been suggested to contribute to the pathogenesis of system lupus erythematosis (SLE), as supported by reduction of SLE symptoms after administration of anti-IL-10 monoclonal antibody [Llorente et al, Arthritis Rheum. 43:1790-18000 (2000)].
Inflammation mediated by Th2 cells that infiltrate airways is critical in the pathology of many allergic diseases, such as asthma. A role for IL-10 in allergic inflammation has been indicated by relatively low levels of IL-10 found in the lungs of asthmatic patients compared to the levels of IL-10 found in the lungs of nonasthmatic patients [John et al, Am. J. Respir. Crit. Care Med. 157:256-62 (1998)]. Higher levels of IL-10 may therefore contribute to limiting pathology inducing Th2 responses.
A role for IL-10 in mucosal immune regulation has been indicated by the development of enterocolitis in homozygous IL-10 negative mice [Kuhn et al, Cell 75:263-74 (1993)]. Correspondingly, colitis onset was prevented in IL-10 negative mice that were administered Lactococcus lactis bacteria which secreted IL-10 [Steidler et al, Science 289:1352-55 (2000)]. IL-10 may therefore be beneficial in treating intestinal immune responses, such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis.
IL-10 has also been suggested to be beneficial in treating certain forms of cancer. In animal model studies of mastocytoma, breast cancer, melanoma, prostate cancer, and colon carcinoma, administration of IL-10 or IL-10 expression by gene transfer into tumor cells inhibited establishment and growth of tumors [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)].
The inhibition of inflammatory immune responses by IL-10 has been further indicated to be beneficial in organ and bone marrow transplantation. IL-10 pretreatment of mice that received heart allografts enhanced graft survival [Li et al, Transplant. Proc. 31 :1 15 (1999)]. In studies of bone marrow transplantation, patients having increased production levels of IL-10 prior to transplantation have been observed to have lower incidence of graft versus host disease and improved survival [Holler et al, Bone Marrow Transplant. 25:237-41 (2000)]. Administration of IL-10 prior to organ or bone marrow transplantation is therefore useful in providing tolerance to transplantation.
IL-10 plays a critical role in the response of the immune system to infectious diseases, which entails balancing the elimination of infection and minimizing nonspecific injury to host tissue. The role of IL-10 in regulating the effects of cytokines and other effector molecules is central to this immune system balancing of pathology and protection. Inhibition of IL-10 enables cytokines and effector molecules to act toward eliminating infection, while production of IL-10 is effective in inhibiting these molecules and preventing inflammatory damage to host tissue. Thus, IL-10 may serve as either a therapeutic target or therapeutic agent for many infectious diseases.
For many infectious diseases, such as leishmaniasis, malaria, filariasis, leprosy, tuberculosis, candidiasis, and avium infection, IL-10 levels have decreased in conjunction with treatment of the infection by drug therapy [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)]. Thus, IL-10 may inhibit protective immunity. This concept is further supported by in vitro restoration of responses of pathogen-specific T cells from infected patients upon treatment with anti-IL- 10 monoclonal antibodies. Neutralization of IL-10 in this fashion has been demonstrated for a number of chronic diseases, including leishmaniasis, filariasis, schistosomiasis, leprosy, and tuberculosis [Moore et al, Ann. Rev. Immunol. 19:683-765 (2001)].
Alternatively, increased levels of IL-10 can be effective in treatment of infectious diseases. Administration of IL-10 to patients with chronic hepatitis C infection has been shown to reverse liver fibrosis without increasing viral titers [Nelson et al, Gastroenterology 118:655-60 (2000)]. In an IL-10 negative mouse model, infection with H. hepaticus renders the mice susceptible to enterocolitis, and infection with B. burgdorferi causes more severe Lyme arthritis than occurs in control, wild-type mice [Kullberg et al, Infect. Immun. 66:5157-66 (1998); Brown et al, Infect. Immun. 67:5142- 50 (1999)]. Thus, both IL-10 and IL-10 inhibitors may prove beneficial in the treatment of infectious diseases, depending on the consequences of a given infectious disease. The similarity of LP401 to IL-10, including two regions suggested to be important for IL-10 function, indicates that LP401 may prove useful as a therapeutic or therapeutic target. LP401 may function in a manner similar to IL-10, such that it administration of LP401 could be useful in treating diseases and conditions that involve inflammation. As detailed above, these diseases and conditions include, but are not limited to, those giving rise to systemic or local inflammation, infectious diseases, autoimmune diseases, allergic responses, intestinal immune regulation, cancer, and graft reception. Alternatively, LP401 might have properties that are antagonistic to IL-10. In this case, LP401 would prove beneficial in diseases or conditions that benefit from a reduction in IL-10 activity. Such diseases are noted herein, and include but are not limited to several infectious diseases, such as leishmaniasis, malaria, filariasis, leprosy, tuberculosis, candidiasis, M. avium infection, and schistosomiasis. Sequence encoding LP401 has been localized to human chromosome region
Iq31-q32. Moreover, the following diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states have also been mapped to this region of the human genome: severe combined immunodeficiency due to protein tyrosine phosphatase receptor type C polypeptide (PTPRC) deficiency [Kung et al, Nature Med. 6:343-345 (2000); Tchilian et al, J. Immun. 166:1308-1313 (2001)], susceptibility to multiple sclerosis [Jacobsen et al, Nature Genet. 26:495-499 (2000)], chitotriosidase deficiency [Boot et al, J. Biol. Chem. 273: 25680-25685 (1998)], retinitis pigmentosa (RP-12) [Bessant et al, J. Med. Genet. 37:384-387 (2000)], leber congenital amaurosis [Marlhens et al, Nature Genet. 17:139- 141 (1997); Nicoletti et al, Hum. Molec. Genet. 4:641-649 (1995)], and Factor XIIIB deficiency [Webb et al, Hum. Genet. 81 :157-160 (1989)]. Accordingly, an isolated and/or recombinant molecule comprising LP401 nucleic acid sequence can be used, for example, to hybridize near a nucleic acid sequence associated with one or more of the above stated diseases, conditions, syndromes, disorders, or pathological states and thus serve as a marker for such a disease gene. The polynucleotides and polypeptides of the present invention are designated herein as "LP polynucleotides" or "LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotides" and "LP polypeptides." When immediately followed by a numerical designation (i.e., LP359), the term "LP" refers to a specific group of molecules as defined herein. A complete designation wherein the term "LP" is immediately followed by a numerical designation and a molecule type (i.e., LP359 polypeptide) refers to a specific type of molecule within the designated group of molecules as designated herein. The terms "LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotides" or "LP polynucleotides" and "LP polypeptides" wherein the term "LP" is followed by an actual numerical designation as used herein encompass novel polynucleotides and polypeptides, respectively, which are further defined herein. The LP molecules described herein may be isolated from a variety of sources including, but not limited to human tissue types, or prepared by recombinant or synthetic methods.
One aspect of the present invention provides an isolated nucleic acid molecule comprising a polynucleotide which encodes an LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, or LP401 polypeptide as defined herein. In a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the isolated nucleic acid comprises 1) a polynucleotide encoding an LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, or LP401 polypeptide having an amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10, respectively; 2) a polynucleotide complementary to such encoding nucleic acid sequences, and which remain stably bound to them under at least moderate, and optionally, high stringency conditions; or 3) any fragment and/or variant of 1) or 2). The term "LP polypeptide" specifically encompasses truncated or secreted forms of an LP polypeptide, (e.g., soluble forms containing, for instance, an extracellular domain sequence), variant forms (e.g., alternatively spliced forms) and allelic variants of an LP polypeptide.
In one embodiment of the invention, the native sequence LP polypeptide is a full- length or mature LP polypeptide comprising amino acids as shown in SEQ ID NO: 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10. Also, while the LP polypeptides disclosed herein are shown to begin with a methionine residue designated as amino acid position 1 it is conceivable and possible that another methionine residue located either upstream or downstream from amino acid position 1 may be employed as the starting amino acid residue. A "portion" of an LP polypeptide sequence is at least about 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,
50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, or 100 contiguous amino acid residues in length.
"LP polypeptide variant" is intended to refer to an "active" LP polypeptide, wherein activity is as defined herein, having at least about 90% amino acid sequence identity with an LP polypeptide having a deduced amino acid sequences as shown above. Such LP polypeptide variants include, for instance, LP polypeptides, wherein one or more amino acid residues are added, substituted or deleted, at the N- or C-terminus or within the sequences shown. Ordinarily, an LP polypeptide variant will have at least about 90% amino acid sequence identity, preferably at least about 91% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 92% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 93% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 94% sequence identity, - yet more preferably at least about 95% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 96% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 97% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 98% sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 99% amino acid sequence identity with the amino acid sequence described, with or without the signal peptide.
The term "similar" or "similarity" as used herein describes the relationship between different nucleic acid compounds or amino acid sequences in which said sequences or molecules are related by partial sequence identity or sequence similarity at one or more blocks or regions within said molecules or sequences.
In referring to amino acid sequences, the term "similar" or "similarity" describes amino acid residues which are either identical between different amino acid sequences, or represent conservative amino acid substitutions between different sequences.
Conservative amino acid substitutions are listed in Table 1 and discussed infra. The term "identity" describes amino acid residues which are identical between different amino acid sequences. Amino acid sequence similarity or identity with respect to each LP amino acid sequence identified herein is defined as the percentage of amino acid residues in a candidate sequence that are similar or identical with the amino acid residues in an LP polypeptide sequence, after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence similarity or identity.
"Percent (%) amino acid sequence identity" with respect to the LP amino acid sequences identified herein is defined as the percentage of amino acid residues in a candidate sequence that are identical with the amino acid residues in an LP polypeptide sequence, after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity, and not considering any conservative substitutions as part of the sequence identity. Alignment for purposes of determining percent amino acid sequence identity can be achieved in various ways that are within the skill in the art, for instance, using publicly available computer software such as ALIGN, ALIGN-2, Megalign (DNASTAR) or BLAST (e.g., Blast, Blast-2, WU-Blast-2) software. Those skilled in the art can determine appropriate parameters for measuring alignment, including any algorithms needed to achieve maximal alignment over the full length of the sequences being compared. For example, the percent identity values used herein are generated using WU-BLAST-2 [Altschul, et al, Methods in Enzymology 266:460-80 (1996)]. Most of the WU-BLAST-2 search parameters are set to the default values. Those not set to default values, i.e., the adjustable parameters, are set with the following values: overlap span = 1; overlap fraction = 0.125; word threshold (T) = 11; and scoring matrix = BLOSUM 62. For purposes herein, a percent amino acid sequence identity value is determined by dividing (a) the number of matching identical amino acid residues between the amino acid sequence of the LP polypeptide of interest and the comparison amino acid sequence of interest (i.e., the sequence against which the LP polypeptide of interest is being compared) as determined by WU-BLAST-2, by (b) the total number of amino acid residues of the LP polypeptide of interest, respectively.
An "LP variant polynucleotide," "LP polynucleotide variant," or "LP variant nucleic acid sequence" are intended to refer to an nucleic acid molecule as defined below having at least about 75% nucleic acid sequence identity with the polynucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3, 5, 7, or 9. Ordinarily, an LP polynucleotide variant will have at least about 75% nucleic acid sequence identity, more preferably at least about 80% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 81% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 82% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 83% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 84% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 85% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 86% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 87% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 88% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 89% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 90% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 91% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 92% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 93% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 94% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 95% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 96% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 97% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 98% nucleic acid sequence identity, yet more preferably at least about 99% nucleic acid sequence identity with the nucleic acid sequences shown above. Variants specifically exclude or do not encompass the native nucleotide sequence, as well as those prior art sequences that share 100% identity with the nucleotide sequences of the invention. "Percent (%) nucleic acid sequence identity" with respect to the LP polynucleotide sequences identified herein is defined as the percentage of nucleotides in a candidate sequence that are identical with the nucleotides in the LP polynucleotide sequence after aligning the sequences and introducing gaps, if necessary, to achieve the maximum percent sequence identity. Alignment for purposes of determining percent nucleic acid sequence identity can be achieved in various ways that are within the skill in the art, for instance, using publicly available computer software such as ALIGN, Align-2, Megalign (DNASTAR), or BLAST (e.g., Blast, Blast-2) software. Those skilled in the art can determine appropriate parameters for measuring alignment, including any algorithms needed to achieve maximal alignment over the full length of the sequences being compared. For purposes herein, however, % nucleic acid identity values are generated using the WU-BLAST-2 (BlastN module) program [Altschul, et al, Methods in Enzymology 266:460-80 (1996)]. Most of the WU-BLAST-2 search parameters are set to the default values. Those not set default values, i.e., the adjustable parameters, are set with the following values: overlap span = 1; overlap fraction = 0.125; word threshold (T) = 11 ; and scoring matrix = BLOSUM62. For purposes herein, a percent nucleic acid sequence identity value is determined by dividing (a) the number of matching identical nucleotides between the nucleic acid sequence of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of interest and the comparison nucleic acid molecule of interest (i.e., the sequence against which the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of interest is being compared) as determined by WU-BLAST-2, by (b) the total number of nucleotides of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of interest.
In addition to calculating percent sequence identity, the BLAST algorithm also performs a statistical analysis of the similarity between two sequences (see, e.g., Karlin and Altschul, 1993, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-5787). One measure of similarity provided by the BLAST algorithm is the smallest sum probability (P(N)), which provides an indication of the probability by which a match between two nucleotide or amino acid sequences would occur by chance. For example, a nucleic acid is considered similar to a reference sequence if the smallest sum probability in a comparison of the test nucleic acid to the reference nucleic acid is less than about 0.1, more preferably less than about 0.01, and most preferably less than about 0.001.
In other embodiments, the LP variant polypeptides are encoded by nucleic acid molecules which are capable of hybridizing, preferably under stringent hybridization and wash conditions, to nucleotide sequences encoding the full-length LP polypeptide as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10. This scope of variant polynucleotides specifically excludes those sequences that are known as of the filing and/or priority dates of the present application. The term "homolog" refers to a molecule from a given organism that exhibits sequence similarity and/or identity and has substantially similar biological activity as a molecule from a different organism. For example, a mouse polypeptide that functions in the mouse in a manner equivalent to which human LP341 functions in humans may be referred to as a mouse homolog of LP341. The term "homolog" is also intended to encompass two or more genes or proteins from different organisms or within a single organism that exhibit sequence similarity and/or identity. The term "homolog" as used herein includes allelic variants, as well as splice variants from an LP polynucleotide sequence.
The term "family" as used herein when referring to the polypeptide and nucleic acid molecules of the invention is intended to designate two or more proteins or nucleic acid molecules having a common structural domain or motif and having sufficient amino acid or nucleotide sequence identity and/or similarity as defined herein. Such family members can be naturally or non-naturally occurring and can be from either the same or different species. For example, a family can contain a first protein of human origin as well as other distinct proteins of human origin, or alternatively, can contain homologs of non-human origin, such as rat or mouse proteins. Members of a family can also have common functional characteristics.
The term "mature protein" or "mature polypeptide" as used herein refers to the form(s) of the protein produced by expression in a mammalian cell. It is generally hypothesized that once export of a growing protein chain across the rough endoplasmic reticulum has been initiated, proteins secreted by mammalian cells have a signal peptide (SP) sequence which is cleaved from the complete polypeptide to produce a "mature" form of the protein. Oftentimes, cleavage of a secreted protein is not uniform and may result in more than one species of mature protein.
The cleavage site of a secreted protein is determined by the primary amino acid sequence of the complete protein. Methods for predicting whether a protein has an SP sequence, as well as the cleavage point for that sequence, are known in the art. For example, programs for predicting signal sequences are exemplified by SPScan, SigCleave and SignalP [Menne et al, Bioinformatics 16:741-2 (2000)] using information from residues surrounding the cleavage site, typically residues -13 to +2 (where +1 indicates the amino terminus of a secreted protein), or from deduced amino acid sequences of secreted polypeptides. The accuracy of predicting cleavage points of known mammalian secretory proteins typically is about 75-80%, however, not all art methods produce the same predicted cleavage point(s) for a given protein. Moreover, cleavage sites can vary from organism to organism and even from molecule to molecule within a cell and cannot be predicted with absolute certainty. Accordingly, the natural positions of the signal cleavage peptide sites and the N-terminal amino acids for the mature LP polypeptides of the present invention may vary from those described herein for LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, or LP401, such that the natural amino terminal of the mature polypeptides may contain as many as 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 additional or fewer amino acids. All such polypeptides and the nucleic acid molecules encoding them are contemplated by the present invention. Optimally, cleavage sites for a secreted protein are determined experimentally by amino-terminal sequencing of the one or more species of mature proteins found within a purified preparation of the protein.
The term "positives," in the context of sequence comparison performed as described above, includes residues in the sequences compared that are not identical but have similar properties (e.g., as a result of conservative substitutions). The percent identity value of positives is determined by the fraction of residues scoring a positive value in the BLOSUM 62 matrix. This value is determined by dividing (a) the number of amino acid residues scoring a positive value in the BLOSUM62 matrix of WU-BLAST-2 between the LP polypeptide amino acid sequence of interest and the comparison amino acid sequence (i.e., the amino acid sequence against which the LP polypeptide sequence is being compared) as determined by WU-BLAST-2, by (b) the total number of amino acid residues of the LP polypeptide of interest.
"Isolated," when used to describe the various polypeptides disclosed herein, means a polypeptide that has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Preferably, the isolated polypeptide is free of association with all components with which it is naturally associated. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials that would typically interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the polypeptide, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes. In preferred embodiments, the polypeptide will be purified (1) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of N- terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, or (2) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing or reducing conditions using Coomassie blue or, preferably, silver stain. Isolated polypeptide includes polypeptide in situ within recombinant cells, since at least one component of the LP polypeptide natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated polypeptide will be prepared by at least one purification step.
An "isolated LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid" or "isolated LP nucleic acid" is a nucleic acid molecule that is identified and separated from at least one contaminant nucleic acid molecule with which it is ordinarily associated in the natural source of the nucleic acid. Such an isolated nucleic acid molecule is other than in the form or setting in which it is found in nature. Isolated nucleic acid molecules therefore are distinguished from the nucleic acid molecule as it exists in natural cells. However, an isolated LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule includes LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecules contained in cells that ordinarily express LP polypeptide where, for example, the nucleic acid molecule is in a chromosomal location different from that of natural cells.
Nucleic acid is "operably linked" when it is placed into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For example, DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation. Generally, "operably linked" means that the DNA sequences being linked are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader, contiguous and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such sites do not exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide adapters or linkers are used in accordance with conventional practice.
The term "amino acid" is used herein in its broadest sense, and includes naturally occurring amino acids as well as non-naturally occurring amino acids, including amino acid analogs and derivatives. The latter includes molecules containing an amino acid moiety. One skilled in the art will recognize, in view of this broad definition, that reference herein to an amino acid includes, for example, naturally occurring proteogenic L-amino acids; D-amino acids; chemically modified amino acids such as amino acid analogs and derivatives; naturally-occurring non-proteogenic amino acids such as norleucine, beta-alanine, ornithine, etc.; and chemically synthesized compounds having properties known in the art to be characteristic of amino acids. As used herein, the term "proteogenic" indicates that the amino acid can be incorporated into a peptide, polypeptide, or protein in a cell through a metabolic pathway.
The incorporation of non-natural amino acids, including synthetic non-native amino acids, substituted amino acids, or one or more D-amino acids into the LP peptides, polypeptides, or proteins of the present invention ("D-LP polypeptides") is advantageous in a number of different ways. D-amino acid-containing peptides, polypeptides, or proteins exhibit increased stability in vitro or in vivo compared to L-amino acid- containing counterparts. Thus, the construction of peptides, polypeptides, or proteins incorporating D-amino acids can be particularly useful when greater intracellular stability is desired or required. More specifically, D-peptides, polypeptides, or proteins are resistant to endogenous peptidases and proteases, thereby providing improved bioavailability of the molecule and prolonged lifetimes in vivo when such properties are desirable. When it is desirable to allow the peptide, polypeptide, or protein to remain active for only a short period of time, the use of L-amino acids therein will permit endogenous peptidases, proteases, etc., in a cell to digest the molecule in vivo, thereby limiting the cell's exposure to the molecule. Additionally, D-peptides, polypeptides, or proteins cannot be processed efficiently for major histocompatibility complex class II- restricted presentation to T helper cells, and are therefore less likely to induce humoral immune responses in the whole organism.
In addition to using D-amino acids, those of ordinary skill in the art are aware that modifications in the amino acid sequence of a peptide, polypeptide, or protein can result in equivalent, or possibly improved, second generation peptides, polypeptides, or proteins, that display equivalent or superior functional characteristics when compared to the original amino acid sequences. Alterations in the LP peptides, polypeptides, or proteins of the present invention can include one or more amino acid insertions, deletions, substitutions, truncations, fusions, shuffling of subunit sequences, and the like, either from natural mutations or human manipulation, provided that the sequences produced by such modifications have substantially the same (or improved or reduced, as may be desirable) activity(ies) as the naturally-occurring counterpart sequences disclosed herein.
One factor that can be considered in making such changes is the hydropathic index of amino acids. The importance of the hydropathic amino acid index in conferring interactive biological function on a protein has been discussed by Kyte and Doolittle [J Mol. Biol. 157:105-32 (1982)]. It is accepted that the relative hydropathic character of amino acids contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein. This, in turn, affects the interaction of the protein with molecules such as enzymes, substrates, receptors, ligands, DNA, antibodies, antigens, etc. Based on its hydrophobicity and charge characteristics, each amino acid has been assigned a hydropathic index as follows: isoleucine (+4.5); valine (+4.2); leucine (+3.8); phenylalanine (+2.8); cysteine/cystine (+2.5); methionine (+1.9); alanine (+1.8); glycine (-0.4); threonine (-0.7); serine (-0.8); tryptophan (-0.9); tyrosine (-1.3); proline (-1.6); histidine (-3.2); glutamate/glutamine/aspartate/asparagine (-3.5); lysine (-3.9); and arginine (-4.5).
As is known in the art, certain amino acids in a peptide, polypeptide, or protein can be substituted for other amino acids having a similar hydropathic index or score and produce a resultant peptide, polypeptide, or protein having similar biological activity, i.e., which still retains biological functionality. In making such changes, it is preferable that amino acids having hydropathic indices within ±2 are substituted for one another. More preferred substitutions are those wherein the amino acids have hydropathic indices within ±1. Most preferred substitutions are those wherein the amino acids have hydropathic indices within ±0.5.
Like amino acids can also be substituted on the basis of hydrophilicity. U.S. Patent 4,554,101 discloses that the greatest local average hydrophilicity of a protein, as governed by the hydrophilicity of its adjacent amino acids, correlates with a biological property of the protein. The following hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acids: arginine/lysine (+3.0); aspartate/glutamate (+3.0±1); serine (+0.3); asparagine/glutamine (+0.2); glycine (0); threonine (-0.4); proline (-0.5±1); alanine/histidine (-0.5); cysteine (-1.0); methionine (-1.3); valine (-1.5); leucine/isoleucine (-1.8); tyrosine (-2.3); phenylalanine (-2.5); and tryptophan (-3.4). Thus, one amino acid in a peptide, polypeptide, or protein can be substituted by another amino acid having a similar hydrophilicity score and still produce a resultant peptide, polypeptide, or protein having similar biological activity, i.e., still retaining correct biological function. In making such changes, amino acids having hydropathic indices within ± 2 are preferably substituted for one another, those within ± 1 are more preferred, and those within ± 0.5 are most preferred.
As outlined above, amino acid substitutions in the LP polypeptides of the present invention can be based on the relative similarity of the amino acid side-chain substituents, for. example, their hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, charge, size, etc. Exemplary substitutions that take various of the foregoing characteristics into consideration in order to produce conservative amino acid changes resulting in silent changes within the present peptides, polypeptides, or proteins can be selected from other members of the class to which the naturally occurring amino acid belongs. Amino acids can be divided into the following four groups: (1) acidic amino acids; (2) basic amino acids; (3) neutral polar amino acids; and (4) neutral non-polar amino acids. Representative amino acids within these various groups include, but are not limited to: (1 ) acidic (negatively charged) amino acids such as aspartic acid and glutamic acid; (2) basic (positively charged) amino acids such as arginine, histidine, and lysine; (3) neutral polar amino acids such as glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, cystine, tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine; and (4) neutral non-polar amino acids such as alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine. It should be noted that changes which are not expected to be advantageous can also be useful if these result in the production of functional sequences. Since small peptides, polypeptides, and some proteins can be easily produced by conventional solid phase synthetic techniques, the present invention includes peptides, polypeptides, or proteins such as those discussed herein, containing the amino acid modifications discussed above, alone or in various combinations. To the extent that such modifications can be made while substantially retaining the activity of the peptide, polypeptide, or protein, they are included within the scope of the present invention. The utility of such modified peptides, polypeptides, or proteins can be determined without undue experimentation by, for example, the methods described herein.
While biologically functional equivalents of the present LP polypeptides can have any number of conservative or non-conservative amino acid changes that do not significantly affect their activity(ies), or that increase or decrease activity as desired, the number of changes preferred may be 40, 30, 20, 10, 5, 3 or fewer changes, or any range or value therein, such as 1 to 30 changes, in particular, ten or fewer amino acid changes may be preferred. More preferably, seven or fewer amino acid changes may be preferred; most preferably, five or fewer amino acid changes may be preferred. The encoding nucleotide sequences (gene, plasmid DNA, cDNA, synthetic DNA, or mRNA, for example) will thus have corresponding base substitutions, permitting them to code expression for the biologically functional equivalent forms of the LP polypeptides. In any case, the LP peptides, polypeptides, or proteins exhibit the same or similar biological or immunological activity(ies) as that(those) of the LP polypeptides specifically disclosed herein, or increased or reduced activity, if desired. The activity(ies) of the variant LP polypeptides can be determined by the methods described herein. Variant LP polypeptides biologically functionally equivalent to those specifically disclosed herein have activity(ies) differing from those of the presently disclosed molecules by about ±50% or less, preferably by about ±40% or less, more preferably by about ±30% or less, more preferably by about ±20% or less, and even more preferably by about ±10% or less, when assayed by the methods disclosed herein. Amino acids in an LP polypeptide of the present invention that are essential for activity can be identified by methods known in the art, such as site-directed mutagenesis or alanine-scanning mutagenesis [Cunningham and Wells, Science 244:1081-5 (1989)]. The latter procedure introduces single alanine mutations at every residue in the molecule. The resulting mutant molecules are then tested for biological activity. Sites that are critical for ligand-protein binding can also be identified by structural analysis such as crystallization, nuclear magnetic resonance, or photoaffinity labeling [Smith, et al, J. Mol. Biol. 224:899-904 (1992); de Vos, et al, Science 255:306-12 (1992)].
"Stringency" of hybridization reactions is readily determinable by one of ordinary skill in the art, and generally is an empirical calculation dependent upon probe length, washing temperature, and salt concentration. In general, longer nucleic acid probes required higher temperatures for proper annealing, while shorter nucleic acid probes need lower temperatures. Hybridization generally depends on the ability of denatured DNA to reanneal when complementary strands are present in an environment below their melting temperature. The higher the degree of desired complementarity between the probe and hybridizable sequence, the higher the relative temperature that can be used. As a result, it follows that higher relative temperatures would tend to make the reactions more stringent, while lower temperatures less so. For additional details and explanation of stringency of hybridization reactions, see Ausubel, et al, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Wiley Interscience Publishers (1995).
"Stringent conditions" or "high stringency conditions," as defined herein, may be identified by those that (1) employ low ionic strength and high temperature for washing, for example, 15 mM sodium chloride/1.5 mM sodium citrate/0.1% sodium dodecyl sulfate at 50 degrees C; (2) employ during hybridization a denaturing agent, such as formamide, for example, 50% (v/v) formamide with 0.1% bovine serum albumin/0.1% fιcoll/0.1% polyvinylpyrrolidone/50 mM sodium phosphate buffer at pH 6.5 with 750 mM sodium chloride/75 mM sodium citrate at 42 degrees C; or (3) employ 50% formamide, 5X SSC (750 mM sodium chloride, 75 mM sodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate (pH 6.8), 0.1% sodium pyrophosphate, 5X Denhardt's solution, sonicated salmon sperm DNA (50 μg/mL), 0.1% SDS, and 10% dextran sulfate at 42 degrees C with washes at 42 degrees C in 0.2X SSC (30 mM sodium chloride/3 mM sodium citrate) and 50% formamide at 55 degrees C, followed by a high- stringency wash consisting of 0.1X SSC containing EDTA at 55 degrees C. "Moderately stringent conditions" may be identified as described by Sambrook, et al. [Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, New York: Cold Spring Harbor Press, (1989)], and include the use of washing solution and hybridization conditions (e.g., temperature, ionic strength and %SDS) less stringent than those described above. An example of moderately stringent conditions is overnight incubation at 37 degrees C in a solution comprising: 20% formamide, 5X SSC (750 mM sodium chloride, 75 mM sodium citrate), 50 mM sodium phosphate at pH 7.6, 5X Denhardt's solution, 10% dextran sulfate, and 20 mg/mL denatured sheared salmon sperm DNA, followed by washing the filters in IX SSC at about 37 to 50 degrees C. The skilled artisan will recognize how to adjust the temperature, ionic strength, etc., as necessary to accommodate factors such as probe length and the like.
The term "epitope tagged" where used herein refers to a chimeric polypeptide comprising an LP polypeptide, or domain sequence thereof, fused to a "tag polypeptide." The tag polypeptide has enough residues to provide an epitope against which an antibody may be made, or which can be identified by some other agent, yet is short enough such that it does not interfere with the activity of the LP polypeptide. The tag polypeptide preferably is also fairly unique so that the antibody does not substantially cross-react with other epitopes. Suitable tag polypeptides generally have at least six amino acid residues and usually between about eight to about fifty amino acid residues (preferably, between about ten to about twenty residues).
As used herein, the term "immunoadhesin," sometimes referred to as an Fc fusion, designates antibody-like molecules that combine the binding specificity of a heterologous protein (an "adhesin") with the effector functions of immunoglobulin constant domains. Structurally, the immunoadhesins comprise a fusion of an amino acid sequence with the desired binding specificity which is other than the antigen recognition and binding site of an antibody (i.e., is "heterologous"), and an immunoglobulin constant domain sequence. The adhesin part of an immunoadhesin molecule typically is a contiguous amino acid sequence comprising at least the binding site of a receptor or a ligand. The immunoglobulin constant domain sequence in the immunoadhesin may be obtained from any immunoglobulin, such as IgG-1, IgG-2, IgG-3 or IgG-4 subtypes, IgA (including IgA-1 and IgA-2), IgE, IgD or IgM. "Active" or "activity" for the purposes herein refers to form(s) of LP polypeptide which retain all or a portion of the biologic and/or immunologic activities of native or naturally-occurring LP polypeptide. Elaborating further, "biological" activity refers to a biological function (either inhibitory or stimulatory) caused by a native or naturally- occurring LP polypeptide other than the ability to induce the production of an antibody against an antigenic epitope possessed by a native or naturally-occurring LP polypeptide. An "immunological" activity refers only to the ability to induce the production of an antibody against an antigenic epitope possessed by a native or naturally-occurring LP polypeptide. The term "antagonist" is used in the broadest sense and includes any molecule that partially or fully blocks, inhibits, or neutralizes a biological activity of a native LP polypeptide disclosed herein. In a similar manner, the term "agonist" is used in the broadest sense and includes any molecule that mimics a biological activity of a native LP polypeptide disclosed herein. Suitable agonist or antagonist molecules specifically include agonist or antagonist antibodies or antibody fragments, fragments or amino acid sequence variants of native LP polypeptides, peptides, ribozymes, anti-sense nucleic acids, small organic molecules, etc. Methods for identifying agonists or antagonists of an LP polypeptide may comprise contacting an LP polypeptide with a candidate agonist or antagonist molecule and measuring a detectable change in one or more biological activities normally associated with the LP polypeptide.
"Antibodies" (Abs) and "immunoglobulins" (Igs) are glycoproteins having the same structural characteristics. While antibodies exhibit binding specificity to a specific antigen, immunoglobulins include both antibodies and other antibody-like molecules that lack antigen specificity. Polypeptides of the latter kind are, for example, produced at low levels by the lymph system and at increased levels by myelomas. The term "antibody" is used in the broadest sense and specifically covers, without limitation, intact monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, multispecific antibodies (e.g., bispecific antibodies) formed from at least two intact antibodies, and antibody fragments so long as they exhibit the desired biological activity. The terms "treating," "treatment," and "therapy" as used herein refer to curative therapy, prophylactic therapy, and preventive therapy. An example of "preventive therapy" is the prevention or lessened targeted pathological condition or disorder. Those in need of treatment include those already with the disorder as well as those prone to have the disorder or those in whom the disorder is to be prevented.
"Chronic" administration refers to administration of the agent(s) in a continuous mode as opposed to an acute mode, so as to maintain the initial therapeutic effect (activity) for an extended period of time. "Intermittent" administration is treatment that is not consecutively done without interruption but, rather, is cyclic in nature.
Administration "in combination with" one or more further therapeutic agents includes simultaneous (concurrent) and consecutive administration in any order.
A "therapeutically-effective amount" is the minimal amount of active agent (e.g., an LP polypeptide, antagonist or agonist thereof) which is necessary to impart therapeutic benefit to a mammal. For example, a "therapeutically-effective amount" to a mammal suffering or prone to suffering or to prevent it from suffering is such an amount which induces, ameliorates, or otherwise causes an improvement in the pathological symptoms, disease progression, physiological conditions associated with or resistance to succumbing to the aforedescribed disorder.
"Carriers" as used herein include pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, excipients, or stabilizers which are nontoxic to the cell or mammal being exposed thereto at the dosages and concentrations employed. Often the physiologically-acceptable carrier is an aqueous pH buffered solution. Examples of physiologically acceptable carriers include buffers such as phosphate, citrate, and other organic acids; antioxidants including ascorbic acid; low molecule weight (less than about 10 residues) polypeptides; proteins, such as serum albumin, gelatin, or immunoglobulins; hydrophilic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; amino acids such as glycine, glutamine, asparagine, arginine or lysine; monosaccharides, disaccharides, and other carbohydrates including glucose, mannose, or dextrins; chelating agents such as EDTA; sugar alcohols such as mannitol or sorbitol; salt-forming counterions such as sodium; and/or nonionic surfactants such as TWEEN®, polyethylene glycol (PEG), and PLURONIC®.
"Antibody fragments" comprise a portion of an intact antibody, preferably the antigen binding or variable region of the intact antibody. Examples of antibody fragments include Fab, Fab', F(ab')2 and Fv fragments; diabodies; linear antibodies
[Zapata, et al, Protein Engin. 8 (10): 1057-62 (1995)]; single-chain antibody molecules; and multispecific antibodies formed from antibody fragments. "Fv" is the minimum antibody fragment which contains a complete antigen- recognition and binding site. This region consists of a dimer of one heavy- and one light- chain variable domain in tight, non-covalent association. It is in this configuration that the three CDRs of each variable domain interact to define an antigen-binding site on the surface of the VHVL dimer. Collectively, the six CDRs confer antigen-binding specificity to the antibody. However, even a single variable domain (or half of an Fv comprising only three CDR specific for an antigen) has the ability to recognize and bind antigen, although at a lower affinity than the entire binding site.
"Single-chain Fv" or "sFv" antibody fragments comprise the VH and VL domains of antibody, wherein these domains are present in a single polypeptide chain. Preferably, the Fv polypeptide further comprises a polypeptide linker between the VH and V domain, which enables the sFv to form the desired structure for antigen binding. For a review of sFv, see Pluckthun, The Pharmacology of Monoclonal Antibodies, vol. 113, Rosenburg and Moore, eds., Springer- Verlag, New York, pp. 269-315 (1994). The term "diabodies" refers to small antibody fragments with two antigen-binding sites, which fragments comprise a heavy-chain variable domain (VH) connected to a light- chain variable domain (VL) in the same polypeptide chain (VHNL). By using a linker that is too short to allow pairing between the two domains on the same chain, the domains are forced to pair with the complementary domains of another chain and create two antigen-binding sites. Diabodies are described more fully in, for example,
EP 404 097; WO 93/11 161; and Hollinger, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:6444-8 (1993).
An "isolated" antibody is one which has been identified and separated and/or recovered from a component of its natural environment. Contaminant components of its natural environment are materials which would interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the antibody, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other proteinaceous or non-proteinaceous solutes. In preferred embodiments, the antibody will be purified (1) to greater than 95% by weight of antibody as determined by the Lowry method, and most preferably more than 99% by weight, (2) to a degree sufficient to obtain at least 15 residues of Ν-terminal or internal amino acid sequence by use of a spinning cup sequenator, or (3) to homogeneity by SDS-PAGE under reducing or nonreducing conditions using Coomassie blue, or preferably, silver stain. Isolated antibody includes the antibody in situ within recombinant cells since at least one component of the antibody's natural environment will not be present. Ordinarily, however, isolated antibody will be prepared by at least one purification step.
An "LP polypeptide antibody" or "LP antibody" refers to an antibody as defined herein that recognizes and binds at least one epitope of an LP polypeptide of the present invention. The term "LP polypeptide antibody" or "LP antibody" wherein the term "LP" is followed by a numerical designation refers to an antibody that recognizes and binds to at least one epitope of that particular LP polypeptide as disclosed herein.
A "liposome" is a small vesicle composed of various types of lipids, phospholipids and/or surfactant which is useful for delivery of a drug (such as an LP polypeptide or antibody thereto) to a mammal. The components of the liposome are commonly arranged in a bilayer formation, similar to the lipid arrangement of biological membranes.
A "small molecule" is defined herein to have a molecular weight below about 500 daltons.
The term "modulate" means to affect (e.g., either upregulate, downregulate or otherwise control) the level of a signaling pathway. Cellular processes under the control of signal transduction include, but are not limited to, transcription of specific genes, normal cellular functions, such as metabolism, proliferation, differentiation, adhesion, apoptosis and survival, as well as abnormal processes, such as transformation, blocking of differentiation and metastasis.
An LP polynucleotide can be composed of any polyribonucleotide or polydeoxyribonucleotide, which may be unmodified RNA or DNA or modified RNA or DNA. For example, the LP polynucleotides can be composed of single- and double- stranded DNA, DNA that is a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, single- and double-stranded RNA, and RNA that is mixture of single- and double-stranded regions, hybrid molecules comprising DNA and RNA that may be single-stranded or, more typically, double-stranded or a mixture of single- and double-stranded regions. In addition, LP polynucleotides can be composed of triple- stranded regions comprising RNA or DNA or both RNA and DNA. LP polynucleotides may also contain one or more modified bases or DNA or RNA backbones modified for stability or for other reasons. "Modified" bases include, for example, tritylated bases and unusual bases such as inosine. A variety of modifications can be made to DNA and RNA; thus, "polynucleotide" embraces chemically, enzymatically, or metabolically modified forms.
LP polypeptides can be composed of amino acids joined to each other by peptide bonds or modified peptide bonds, i.e., peptide isosteres, and may contain amino acids other than the gene-encoded amino acids. The LP polypeptides may be modified by either natural processes, such as post-translational processing, or by chemical modification techniques which are well known in the art. Such modifications are well described in basic texts and in more detailed monographs, as well as in a voluminous research literature. Modifications can occur anywhere in the LP polypeptides, including the peptide backbone, the amino acid side-chains and the amino or carboxyl termini. It will be appreciated that the same type of modification may be present in the same or varying degrees at several sites in a given LP polypeptide. Also, a given LP polypeptide may contain many types of modifications. LP polypeptides may be branched, for example, as a result of ubiquitination, and they may be cyclic, with or without branching. Cyclic, branched, and branched cyclic LP polypeptides may result from post-translation natural processes or may be made by synthetic methods. Modifications include acetylation, acylation, ADP-ribosylation, amidation, covalent attachment of flavin, covalent attachment of a heme moiety, covalent attachment of a nucleotide or nucleotide derivative, covalent attachment of a lipid or lipid derivative, covalent attachment of phosphotidylinositol, cross-linking, cyclization, disulfide bond formation, demethylation, formation of covalent cross-links, formation of cysteine, formation of pyroglutamate, formylation, gamma-carboxylation, glycosylation, GPI anchor formation, hydroxylation, iodination, methylation, myristoylation, oxidation, pegylation, proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, prenylation, racemization, selenoylation, sulfation, transfer-RNA mediated addition of amino acids to proteins such as arginylation, and ubiquitination. See, for instance, Creighton, Proteins - Structure and Molecular Properties, 2nd Ed., W. H. Freeman and Company, New York (1993); Johnson, Post-translational Covalent Modification of Proteins, Academic Press, New York, pp. 1-12 (1983); Seifter, et al, Meth. Enzymol 182:626-46 (1990); Rattan, et al, Ann. NY Acad. Sci. 663:48-62 (1992). Variations in the full-length sequence LP polypeptide or in various domains of the
LP polypeptide described herein can be made, for example, using any of the techniques and guidelines for conservative and non-conservative mutations set forth, for instance, in U.S. Patent 5,364,934. Variations may be a substitution, deletion or insertion of one or more codons encoding LP polypeptide that results in a change in the amino acid sequence of the LP polypeptide as compared with the native sequence LP polypeptide or an LP polypeptide as disclosed herein. Optionally the variation is by substitution of at least one amino acid with any other amino acid in one or more of the domains of the LP polypeptide. Guidance in determining which amino acid residue may be inserted, substituted or deleted without adversely affecting the desired activity may be found by comparing the sequence of the LP polypeptide with that of homologous known protein molecules and minimizing the number of amino acid sequence changes made in regions of high identity and/or similarity. Amino acid substitutions can be the result of replacing one amino acid with another amino acid having similar structural and/or chemical properties, such as the replacement of a leucine with a serine, i.e., conservative amino acid replacements. Insertions or deletions may optionally be in the range of one to five amino acids. The variation allowed may be determined by systematically making insertions, deletions or substitutions of amino acids in the sequence and testing the resulting variants for activity (such as in any of the in vitro assays described herein) for activity exhibited by the full-length or mature polypeptide sequence.
LP polypeptide fragments are also provided herein. Such fragments may be truncated at the N-terminus or C-terminus, or may lack internal residues, for example, when compared with a full length or native protein. Certain fragments contemplated by the present invention may lack amino acid residues that are not essential for a desired biological activity of the LP polypeptide.
LP polypeptide fragments may be prepared by any of a number of conventional techniques. Desired peptide fragments may be chemically synthesized. An alternative approach involves generating LP fragments by enzymatic digestion, e.g., by treating the protein with an enzyme known to cleave proteins at sites defined by particular amino acid residues, or by digesting the DNA with suitable restriction enzymes and isolating the desired fragment. Yet another suitable technique involves isolating and amplifying a DNA fragment encoding a desired polypeptide fragment by polymerase chain reaction (PCR). Oligonucleotides that define the desired termini of the DNA fragment are employed at the 5' and 3' primers in the PCR. Preferably, LP polypeptide fragments share at least one biological and/or immunological activity with at least one of the LP polypeptides as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10.
Covalent modifications of LP polypeptides are included within the scope of this invention. One type of covalent modification includes reacting targeted amino acid residues of an LP polypeptide with an organic derivatizing agent that is capable of reacting with selected side chains or the N- or C-terminal residues of an LP polypeptide. Derivatization with bifunctional agents is useful, for instance, for crosslinking LP polypeptide to a water-insoluble support matrix or surface for use in the method for purifying anti-LP polypeptide antibodies, and vice-versa. Commonly used crosslinking agents include, e.g., l ,l -bis(diazoacetyl)-2-phenylethane, glutaraldehyde, N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, for example, esters with 4-azidosalicylic acid, homobifunctional imidoesters, including disuccinimidyl esters such as 3,3'-dithiobis- (succinimidylproprionate), bifunctional maleimides such as bis-N-maleimido-l ,8-octane and agents such as methyl-3-[(p-azidophenyl)dithiolproprioimidate. Other modifications include deamidation of glutaminyl and asparaginyl residues to the corresponding glutamyl and aspartyl residues, respectively, hydroxylation of proline and lysine, phosphorylation of hydroxyl groups of seryl or threonyl residues, methylation of the alpha-amino groups of lysine, arginine, and histidine side chains [Creighton, Proteins: Structure and Molecular Properties, W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, pp. 79-86 (1983)], acetylation of the N-terminal amine, and amidation of any C-terminal carboxyl group.
Another type of covalent modification of the LP polypeptides included within the scope of this invention comprises altering the native glycosylation pattern of the polypeptide. "Altering the native glycosylation pattern" is intended for purposes herein to mean deleting one or more carbohydrate moieties found in native sequence LP polypeptide and/or adding one or more glycosylation sites that are not present in the native sequences of LP polypeptides. Additionally, the phrase includes qualitative changes in the glycosylation of the native proteins, involving a change in the nature and proportions of the various carbohydrate moieties present. Addition of glycosylation sites to LP polypeptides may be accomplished by altering the amino acid sequence thereof. The alteration may be made, for example, by the addition of, or substitution by, one or more serine or threonine residues to the native sequences of LP polypeptides (for O-linked glycosylation sites). The LP amino acid sequences may optionally be altered through changes at the DNA level, particularly by mutating the DNA encoding the LP polypeptides at preselected bases such that codons are generated that will translate into the desired amino acids. Another means of increasing the number of carbohydrate moieties on the LP polypeptides is by chemical or enzymatic coupling of glycosides to the polypeptide. Such methods are described in the art, e.g., in WO 87/05330, and in Aplin and Wriston, CRC Crit. Rev. Biochem., pp. 259-306 (1981).
Removal of carbohydrate moieties present on the LP polypeptide may be accomplished chemically or enzymatically or by mutational substitution of codons encoding for amino acid residues that serve as targets for glycosylation. Chemical deglycosylation techniques are known in the art and described, for instance, by Sojar, et al, Arch. Biochem. Biophys. 259:52-7 (1987), and by Edge, et al, Anal. Biochem. 118:131-7 (1981). Enzymatic cleavage of carbohydrate moieties on polypeptides can be achieved by the use of a variety of endo- and exo-glycosidases as described by Thotakura, et al, Meth. Enzymol. 138:350-9 (1987).
Another type of covalent modification of LP comprises linking any one of the LP polypeptides to one of a variety of non-proteinaceous polymers (e.g., polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, or polyoxyalkylenes) in the manner set forth in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,640,835; 4,496,689; 4,301,144; 4,670,417; 4,791 ,192, or 4,179,337.
LP polypeptides of the present invention may also be modified in a way to form chimeric molecules comprising an LP polypeptide fused to another heterologous polypeptide or amino acid sequence. In one embodiment, such a chimeric molecule comprises a fusion of an LP polypeptide with a tag polypeptide which provides an epitope to which an anti-tag antibody can selectively bind. The epitope tag is generally placed at the amino- or carboxyl- terminus of LP359, LP364, LP381 , LP400, or LP401 polypeptide. The presence of such epitome-tagged forms of an LP polypeptide can be detected using an antibody against the tag polypeptide. Also, provision of the epitome tag enables an LP polypeptide to be readily purified by affinity purification using an anti- tag antibody or another type of affinity matrix that binds to the epitome tag.
In an alternative embodiment, the chimeric molecule may comprise a fusion of an LP polypeptide with an immunoglobulin or a particular region of an immunoglobulin. For a bivalent form of the chimeric molecule, such a fusion could be to the Fc region of an IgG molecule. The Ig fusions preferably include the substitution of a soluble transmembrane domain deleted or inactivated form of an LP polypeptide in place of at least one variable region within an Ig molecule. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the immunoglobulin fusion includes the hinge, CH2 and CH3 or the hinge, CHI, CH2 and CH3 regions of an IgGl molecule. For the production of immunoglobulin fusions, see also U.S. Patent 5,428,130.
In yet a further embodiment, the LP polypeptides of the present invention may also be modified in a way to form a chimeric molecule comprising an LP polypeptide fused to a leucine zipper. Various leucine zipper polypeptides have been described in the art. See, e.g., Landschulz, et al, Science 240(4860): 1759-64 (1988); WO 94/10308; Hoppe, et al, FEBS Letters 344(2-3):191-5 (1994); Abel, et al, Nature 341(6237):24-5 (1989). It is believed that use of a leucine zipper fused to an LP polypeptide may be desirable to assist in dimerizing or trimerizing soluble LP polypeptide in solution. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the zipper may be fused at either the N- or C-terminal end of an LP polypeptide.
The description below relates primarily to production of LP polypeptides by culturing cells transformed or transfected with a vector containing an LP polypeptide- encoding nucleic acid. It is, of course, contemplated that alternative methods, which are well known in the art, may be employed to prepare LP polypeptides. For instance, the LP polypeptide sequence, or portions thereof, may be produced by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques [see, e.g., Stewart, et al, Solid-Phase Peptide Synthesis, W.H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, CA (1969); Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85:2149- 2154 (1963)]. In vitro protein synthesis may be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis may be accomplished, for instance, using an Applied Biosystems Peptide Synthesizer (Foster City, CA) using manufacturer's instructions. Various portions of an LP polypeptide may be chemically synthesized separately and combined using chemical or enzymatic methods to produce a full-length LP polypeptide. DNA encoding an LP polypeptide may be obtained from a cDNA library prepared from tissue believed to possess the LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA and to express it at a detectable level. Libraries can be screened with probes (such as antibodies to an LP polypeptide or oligonucleotides of at least about 20 to 80 bases) designed to identify the gene of interest or the protein encoded by it. Screening the cDNA or genomic library with the selected probe may be conducted using standard procedures, such as described in Sambrook, et al, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, NY (1989). An alternative means to isolate the gene encoding an LP polypeptide is to use PCR methodology [Sambrook, et al, supra; Dieffenbach, et al, PCR Primer: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, NY (1995)].
Nucleic acids having protein coding sequence may be obtained by screening selected cDNA or genomic libraries using the deduced amino acid sequence disclosed herein for the first time and, if necessary, using conventional primer extension procedures as described in Sambrook, et al, supra, to detect precursors and processing intermediates of mRNA that may not have been reverse-transcribed into cDNA.
Host cells are transfected or transformed with expression or cloning vectors described herein for LP polypeptide production and cultured in conventional nutrient media modified as appropriate for inducing promoters, selecting transformants, or amplifying the genes encoding the desired sequences. The culture conditions, such as media, temperature, pH and the like, can be selected by the skilled artisan without undue experimentation. In general, principles, protocols, and practical techniques for maximizing the productivity of cell cultures can be found in Mammalian Cell Biotechnology: A Practical Approach, Butler, ed. (IRL Press, 1991) and Sambrook, et al, supra. Methods of fransfection are known to the ordinarily skilled artisan, for example, calcium phosphate and electroporation. General aspects of mammalian cell host system transformations have been described in U.S. Patent 4,399,216. Transformations into yeast are typically carried out according to the method of van Solingen, et al, J. Bad. 130(2):946-7 (1977) and Hsiao, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 76(8):3829-33 (1979). However, other methods for introducing DNA into cells, such as by nuclear microinjection, electroporation, bacterial protoplast fusion with intact cells, or polycations, e.g., polybrene or polyornithine, may also be used. For various techniques for transforming mammalian cells, see Keown, et al, Meths. in Enzymology 185:527-37 (1990) and Mansour, et al, Nature 336(6197):348-52 (1988).
Suitable host cells for cloning or expressing the nucleic acid (e.g., DNA) in the vectors herein include prokaryote, yeast, or higher eukaryote cells. Suitable prokaryotes include but are not limited to eubacteria, such as Gram-negative or Gram-positive organisms, for example, Enterobacteriacea such as E. coli. Various E. coli strains are publicly available, such as E. coli K12 strain MM294 (ATCC 31,446); E. coli strain X1776 (ATCC 31,537); E. coli strain W3110 (ATCC 27,325) and K5 772 (ATCC 53,635). Other suitable prokaryotic host cells include Enterobacteriaceae such as Escherichia, e.g., E. coli, Enterobacter, Erwinia, Klebsiella, Proteus, Salmonella, e.g., Salmonella typhimurium, Serratia, e.g., Serratia marcescans, and Shigella, as well as Bacilli such as B. subtilis and B. licheniformis (e.g., B. licheniformis 41P disclosed in DD 266,710, published 12 April 1989), Pseudomonas such as P. aeruginosa, and Streptomyces. These examples are illustrative rather than limiting. Strain W3110 is one particularly preferred host or parent host because it is a common host strain for recombinant DNA product fermentations. Preferably, the host cell secretes minimal amounts of proteolytic enzymes. For example, strain W3 110 may be modified to effect a genetic mutation in a gene encoding proteins endogenous to the host, with examples of such hosts including E. coli W31 10 strain 1A2, which has the complete genotype tonAD; E. coli W31 10 strain 9E4, which has the complete genotype tonAD ptr3; E. coli W31 10 strain 27C7 (ATCC 55,244), which has the complete genotype tonAD ptr3 phoADE15 D(argF-lac)169 ompTD degP41kanR ; E. coli W31 10 strain 37D6, which has the complete genotype tonAD ptr3 phoADE15 D(argF-lac)169 ompTD degP41kanR rbs7D ilvG; E. coli W3110 strain 40B4, which is strain 37D6 with a non-kanamycin resistant degP deletion mutation; and an E. coli strain having mutant periplasmic protease as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,946,783 issued 7 August 1990. Alternatively, in vivo methods of cloning, e.g., PCR or other nucleic acid polymerase reactions, are suitable. In addition to prokaryotes, eukaryotic microbes such as filamentous fungi or yeast are suitable cloning or expression hosts for LP vectors. Saccharomyces cerevisiae is a commonly used lower eukaryotic host microorganism. Others include Schizosaccharomyces pombe [Beach and Nurse, Nature 290:140-3 (1981); EP 139,383 published 2 May 1995]; Muyveromyces hosts [U.S. Patent 4,943,529 Fleer, et al, Bio/Technology 9(10):968-75 (1991)] such as, e.g., K. lactis (MW98-8C, CBS683, CBS4574) [de Louvencourt, et al, J. Bacteriol 154(2):737-42 (1983)]; K. fiagilis (ATCC 12,424), K. bulgaricus (ATCC 16,045), K wickeramii (ATCC 24,178), K. waltii (ATCC 56,500), K. drosophilarum (ATCC 36.906) [Van den Berg, et al, Bio/Technology 8(2): 135-9 (1990)]; K. thermotolerans, and K. marxianus; yarrowia (EP 402,226); Pichia pastoris (EP 183,070) [Sreekrishna, et al, J. Basic Microbiol. 28(4):265-78 (1988)]; Candida; Trichoderma reesia (EP 244,234); Neurospora crassa [Case, et al, Proc. Natl Acad Sci. USA 76(10):5259-63 (1979)]; Schwanniomyces such as Schwanniomyces occidentulis (EP 394,538 published 31 October 1990); and filamentous fungi such as, e.g., Neurospora, Penicillium, Tolypocladium (WO 91/00357 published 10 January 1991), and Aspergillus hosts such as A. nidulans [Ballance, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 112(l):284-9 (1983); Tilburn, et al, Gene 26(2-3):205-21 (1983); Yelton, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81(5):1470-4 (1984)] and A. niger [Kelly and Hynes, EMBO J. 4(2):475-9 (1985)]. Methylotropic yeasts are selected from the genera consisting of Hansenula, Candida, Kloeckera, Pichia, Saccharomyces, Torulopsis, and Rhodotoruia. A list of specific species that are exemplary of this class of yeast may be found in Antony, The Biochemistry of Methylotrophs 269 (1982).
Suitable host cells for the expression of glycosylated LP polypeptides are derived from multicellular organisms. Examples of invertebrate cells include insect cells such as Drosophila S2 and Spodoptera Sp, Spodoptera high5 as well as plant cells. Examples of useful mammalian host cell lines include Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and COS cells. More specific examples include monkey kidney CVl line transformed by SV40 (COS-7, ATCC CRL 1651); human embryonic kidney line [293 or 293 cells subcloned for growth in suspension culture, Graham, et al, J. Gen Virol, 36(l):59-74 (1977)]; Chinese hamster ovary cells/-DHFR [CHO, Urlaub and Chasin, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 77(7):4216-20 (1980)]; mouse sertoli cells [TM4, Mather, Biol. Reprod. 23(l):243-52 (1980)]; human lung cells (W138, ATCC CCL 75); human liver cells (Hep G2, HB
8065); and mouse mammary tumor (MMT 060562, ATCC CCL51). The selection of the appropriate host cell is deemed to be within the skill in the art.
LP polypeptides may be produced recombinantly not only directly, but also as a fusion polypeptide with a heterologous polypeptide, which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide. In general, the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or it may be a part of the LP polypeptide-encoding DNA that is inserted into the vector. The signal sequence may be a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the group of the alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, lpp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II leaders. For yeast secretion the signal sequence may be, e.g., the yeast invertase leader, alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces cc-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Patent 5,010,182), or acid phosphatase leader, the C. albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179), or the signal described in WO 90/13646. In mammalian cell expression, mammalian signal sequences may be used to direct secretion of the protein, such as signal sequences from secreted polypeptides of the same or related species as well as viral secretory leaders. Both expression and cloning vectors contain a nucleic acid sequence that enables the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast, and viruses. The origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2μ plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (SV40, polyoma, adenovirus, VSV or BPV) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells.
Expression and cloning vectors will typically contain a selection gene, also termed a selectable marker. Typical selection genes encode proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxins, e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available from complex media, e.g., the gene encoding D-alanine racemase for Bacilli. An example of suitable selectable markers for mammalian cells are those that enable the identification of cells competent to take up the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid, such as DHFR or thymidine kinase. An appropriate host cell when wild- type DHFR is employed is the CHO cell line deficient in DHFR activity, prepared and propagated as described Urlaub and Chasin, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 77(7):4216-20 (1980). A suitable selection gene for use in yeast is the trpl gene present in the yeast plasmid YRp7 [Stinchcomb, et al, Nature 282(5734):39-43 (1979); Kingsman, et al, Gene 7(2):141-52 (1979); Tschumper, et al, Gene 10(2):157-66 (1980)]. The trpl gene provides a selection marker for a mutant strain of yeast lacking the ability to grow in tryptophan, for example, ATCC No. 44076 or PEPCl [Jones, Genetics 85:23-33 (1977)]. Expression and cloning vectors usually contain a promoter operably linked to the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid sequence to direct mRNA synthesis. Promoters recognized by a variety of potential host cells are well known. Promoters suitable for use with prokaryotic hosts include the P-lactamase and lactose promoter systems [Chang, et al, Nature 215(56S\):6\l-24 (\91S); Goeddd, et al, Nature 28\(5132):544-S (\919)], alkaline phosphatase, a tryptophan (up) promoter system [Goeddel, Nucleic Acids Res. 8(18):4057-74 (1980); EP 36,776 published 30 September 1981], and hybrid promoters such as the tat promoter [deBoer, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 80(l):21-5 (1983)]. Promoters for use in bacterial systems also will contain a Shine-Dai garno (S.D.) sequence operably linked to the DNA encoding LP polypeptide.
Examples of suitable promoting sequences for use with yeast hosts include the promoters for 3-phosphoglycerate kinase [Hitzeman, et al, J. Biol. Chem.
255(24):12073-80 (1980)] or other glycolytic enzymes [Hess, et al, J. Adv. Enzyme Reg. 7:149 (1968); Holland, Biochemistry 17(23):4900-7 (1978)], such as enolase, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, hexokinase, pyruvate decarboxylase, phosphofructokinase, glucose-6-phosphate isomerase, 3-phosphoglycerate mutase, pyruvate kinase, triosephosphate isomerase, phosphoglucose isomerase, and glucokinase. Other yeast promoters, which are inducible promoters having the additional advantage of transcription controlled by growth conditions, are the promoter regions for alcohol dehydrogenase 2, isocytochrome C, acid phosphatase, degradative enzymes associated with nitrogen metabolism, metallothionein, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, and enzymes responsible for maltose and galactose utilization. Suitable vectors and promoters for use in yeast expression are further described in EP 73,657. LP transcription from vectors in mammalian host cells is controlled, for example, by promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus, adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2), bovine papilloma virus, avian sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a refrovirus, hepatitis-B virus and Simian Virus 40 (SV40), from heterologous mammalian promoters, e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter, and from heat-shock promoters, provided such promoters are compatible with the host cell systems.
Transcription of a polynucleotide encoding an LP polypeptide by higher eukaryotes may be increased by inserting an enhancer sequence into the vector.
Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription. Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, alpha-ketoprotein, and insulin). Typically, however, one will use an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40 enhancer on the late side of the replication origin (bp 100-270), the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers. The enhancer may be spliced into the vector at a position 5' or 3' to the LP polypeptide coding sequence but is preferably located at a site 5' from the promoter.
Expression vectors used in eukaryotic host cells (yeast, fungi, insect, plant, animal, human, or nucleated cells from other multicellular organisms) will also contain sequences necessary for the termination of transcription and for stabilizing the mRNA. Such sequences are commonly available from the 5' and occasionally 3' untranslated regions of eukaryotic or viral DNAs or cDNAs. These regions contain nucleotide segments transcribed as polyadenylated fragments in the untranslated portion of the mRNA encoding LP. Gene amplification and/or expression may be measured in a sample directly, for example, by conventional Southern blotting, Northern blotting to quantitate the transcription of mRNA [Thomas, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77(9):5201-5 (1980)], dot blotting (DNA analysis), or in situ hybridization, using an appropriately labeled probe, based on the sequences provided herein. Alternatively, antibodies may be employed that can recognize specific duplexes, including DNA duplexes, RNA duplexes, and DNA- RNA hybrid duplexes or DNA-protein duplexes. The antibodies in turn may be labeled and the assay may be carried out where the duplex is bound to a surface, so that upon the formation of duplex on the surface, the presence of antibody bound to the duplex can be detected. Gene expression, alternatively, may be measured by immunological methods, such as immunohistochemical staining of cells or tissue sections and assay of cell culture or body fluids, to quantitate directly the expression of gene product. Antibodies useful for immunohistochemical staining and/or assay of sample fluids may be either monoclonal or polyclonal and may be prepared in any mammal. Conveniently, the antibodies may be prepared against a native sequence provided herein or against exogenous sequence fused to an LP polypeptide-encoding DNA and encoding a specific antibody epitope.
Various forms of an LP polypeptide may be recovered from culture medium or from host cell lysates. If membrane-bound, it can be released from the membrane using a suitable detergent solution (e.g., Triton X-100τ ) or by enzymatic cleavage. Cells employed in expression of an LP polypeptide can be disrupted by various physical or chemical means, such as freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or cell lysing agents.
It may be desireable to purify LP polypeptides from recombinant cell proteins or polypeptides. The following procedures are exemplary of suitable purification procedures: by fractionation on an ion-exchange column; ethanol precipitation; reversed- phase HPLC; chromatography on silica or on a cation-exchange resin such as DEAE; chromatofocusing; SDS-PAGE; ammonium sulfate precipitation; gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex® G-75; protein A Sepharose® columns to remove contaminants such as IgG; and metal chelating columns to bind epitope-tagged forms of an LP polypeptide. Various methods of protein purification may be employed and such methods are known in the art and described, for example, in Deutscher, Methods in Enzymology 182:83-9 (1990) and Scopes, Protein Purification: Principles and Practice, Springer- Verlag, NY (1982). The purification step(s) selected will depend, for example, on the nature of the production process used and the particular LP polypeptide produced. Nucleotide sequences (or their complement) encoding LP polypeptides have various applications in the art of molecular biology, including uses as hybridization probes, in chromosome and gene mapping and in the generation of anti-sense RNA and DNA. LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acids will also be useful for the preparation of LP polypeptides by the recombinant techniques described herein. The full-length LP polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequence (e.g., SEQ ID
NO:l , 3, 5, 7, or 9), or portions thereof, may be useful as hybridization probes for probing a cDNA or genomic library to isolate the full-length LP polypeptide-encoding cDNA or genomic sequences including promoters, enhancer elements and introns of native sequence LP polypeptide-encoding DNA or to isolate still other genes (for instance, those encoding naturally-occurring variants of LP polypeptides or the same from other species) which have a desired sequence identity to the LP polypeptide- encoding nucleotide sequence disclosed in SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, or 9. Hybridization techniques are well known in the art and some of which are described in further detail in the Examples below.
Other useful fragments of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acids include anti- sense or sense oligonucleotides comprising a single-stranded nucleic acid sequence (either RNA or DNA) capable of binding to target LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA (sense) of LP polypeptide-encoding DNA (anti-sense) sequences. Anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides, according to the present invention, comprise a fragment of the coding region of LP polypeptide-encoding DNA. Such a fragment generally comprises at least about 14 nucleotides, preferably from about 14 to 30 nucleotides. The ability to derive an anti-sense or a sense oligonucleotide, based upon a cDNA sequence encoding a given protein is described in, for example, Stein and Cohen, Cancer Res. 48(10):2659-68 (1988) and van der Krol, et al, Bio/Techniques 6(10):958-76 (1988).
Binding of anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides to target nucleic acid sequences results in the formation of duplexes that block transcription or translation of the target sequence by one of several means, including enhanced degradation of the duplexes, premature termination of transcription or translation, or by other means. The anti-sense oligonucleotides thus may be used to block expression of LP mRNA and therefore any LP polypeptide encoded thereby. Anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides further comprise oligonucleotides having modified sugar-phosphodiester backbones (or other sugar linkages, such as those described in WO 91/06629) and wherein such sugar linkages are resistant to endogenous nucleases. Such oligonucleotides with resistant sugar linkages are stable in vivo (i.e., capable of resisting enzymatic degradation) but retain sequence specificity to be able to bind to target nucleotide sequences.
Other examples of sense or anti-sense oligonucleotides include those oligonucleotides which are covalently linked to organic moieties, such as those described in WO 90/10448, and other moieties that increase affinity of the oligonucleotide for a target nucleic acid sequence, such poly-L-lysine. Further still, intercalating agents, such as ellipticine, and alkylating agents or metal complexes may be attached to sense or anti- sense oligonucleotides to modify binding specificities of the anti-sense or sense oligonucleotide for the target nucleotide sequence.
Anti-sense or sense oligonucleotides may be introduced into a cell containing the target nucleic acid sequence by any gene transfer method, including, for example, calcium phosphate-mediated DNA fransfection, electroporation, or by using gene transfer vectors such as Epstein-Barr virus. In a preferred procedure, an anti-sense or sense oligonucleotide is inserted into a suitable retroviral vector. A cell containing the target nucleic acid sequence is contacted with the recombinant retroviral vector, either in vivo or ex vivo. Suitable retroviral vectors include, but are not limited to, those derived from the murine retrovirus M-MSV, N2 (a retrovirus derived from M-MuLV), or the double copy vectors designated CDTSA, CTSB and DCTSC (see WO 90/13641).
Alternatively, a sense or an anti-sense oligonucleotide may be introduced into a cell containing the target nucleic acid sequence by formation of an oligonucleotide-lipid complex, as described in WO 90/10448. The sense or anti-sense oligonucleotide-lipid complex is preferably dissociated within the cell by an endogenous lipase.
When the amino acid sequence for an LP polypeptide encodes a protein which binds to another protein (for example, where the LP polypeptide functions as a receptor), the LP polypeptide can be used in assays to identify the other proteins or molecules involved in the binding interaction. By such methods, inhibitors of the receptor/ligand binding interaction can be identified. Proteins involved in such binding interactions can also be used to screen for peptide or small molecule inhibitors or agonists of the binding interaction. Also, the receptor LP polypeptide can be used to isolate correlative ligand(s). Screening assays can be designed to find lead compounds that mimic the biological activity of the LP polypeptides disclosed herein or a receptor for such LP polypeptides. Typical screening assays will include assays amenable to high-throughput screening of chemical libraries, making them particularly suitable for identifying small molecule drug candidates. Small molecules contemplated include synthetic organic or inorganic compounds. The assays can be performed in a variety of formats, including protein- protein binding assays, biochemical screening assays, immunoassays and cell based assays, which are well characterized in the art.
Nucleic acids which encode an LP polypeptide of the present invention or any of its modified forms can also be used to generate either transgenic animals or "knockout" animals which, in turn, are useful in the development and screening of therapeutically useful reagents. Methods for generating transgenic animals, particularly animals such as mice or rats, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Patents 4,736,866 and 4,870,009. Typically, particular cells would be targeted for an LP transgene incorporation with tissue-specific enhancers. Transgenic animals that include a copy of a transgene introduced into the germ line of the animal at an embryonic stage can be used to examine the effect of increased expression of DNA encoding an LP polypeptide. Such animals can be used as tester animals for reagents thought to confer protection from, for example, pathological conditions associated with its overexpression. In accordance with this facet of the invention, an animal is treated with the reagent and a reduced incidence of the pathological condition, compared to untreated animals bearing the transgene, would indicate a potential therapeutic intervention for the pathological condition. Alternatively, non-human homologs of LP polynucleotides can be used to construct a "knockout" animal which has a defective or altered gene encoding a particular LP polypeptide as a result of homologous recombination between the endogenous gene encoding the LP polypeptide and the altered genomic DNA introduced into an embryonic cell of the animal. For example, cDNA encoding an LP polypeptide can be used to clone genomic DNA encoding that LP polypeptide in accordance with established techniques. A portion of the genomic DNA encoding an LP polypeptide can be deleted or replaced with another gene, such as a gene encoding a selectable marker which can be used to monitor integration. Typically, several kilobases of unaltered flanking DNA (both at the 5' and 3' ends) are included in the vector [see, e.g., Thomas and Capecchi, Cell 51(3):503-12 (1987) for a description of homologous recombination vectors]. The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation), and cells in which the introduced DNA has homologously recombined with the endogenous DNA are selected [see, e.g., Li, et al, Cell 69(6):915-26 (1992)]. The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse or rat) to form aggregation chimeras [see, e.g., Bradley, Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed., pp. 113-152 (IRL, Oxford, 1987)]. A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term to create a "knockout" animal. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be identified by standard techniques and used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA. Knockout animals can be characterized, for instance, for their ability to defend against certain pathological conditions and for their development of pathological conditions due to absence of the native LP polypeptide.
Transgenic non-human mammals are useful as an animal models in both basic research and drug development endeavors. Transgenic animals expressing at least one LP polypeptide or nucleic acid can be used to test compounds or other treatment modalities which may prevent, suppress, or cure a pathology or disease associated with at least one of the above mentioned activities. Such transgenic animals can also serve as a model for the testing of diagnostic methods for those same diseases. Furthermore, tissues derived from such transgenic non-human mammals are useful as a source of cells for cell culture in efforts to develop in vitro bioassays to identify compounds that modulate LP polypeptide activity or LP polypeptide dependent signaling. Accordingly, another aspect of the present invention contemplates a method of identifying compounds efficacious in the treatment of at least one previously described disease or pathology associated with an LP polypeptide associated activity. A non-limiting example of such a method comprises: a) generating a transgenic non-human animal which expresses an LP polypeptide of the present invention and which is, as compared to a wild-type animal, pathologically distinct in some detectable or measurable manner from wild-type version of said non- human mammal; b) exposing said transgenic animal to a compound, and; c) determining the progression of the pathology in the treated transgenic animal, wherein an arrest, delay, or reversal in disease progression in transgenic animal treated with said compound as compared to the progression of the pathology in an untreated control animals is indicative that the compound is useful for the treatment of said pathology. Another embodiment of the present invention provides a method of identifying compounds capable of inhibiting LP polypeptide activity in vivo and/or in vitro wherein said method comprises: a) administering an experimental compound to an LP polypeptide expressing transgenic non-human animal, or tissues derived therefrom, exhibiting one or more physiological or pathological conditions attributable to the expression of an LP transgene; and b) observing or assaying said animal and/or animal tissues to detect changes in said physiological or pathological condition or conditions.
Another embodiment of the invention provides a method for identifying compounds capable of overcoming deficiencies in LP polypeptide activity in vivo or in vitro wherein said method comprises: a) administering an experimental compound to an LP polypeptide expressing transgenic non-human animal, or tissues derived therefrom, exhibiting one or more physiological or pathological conditions attributable to the disruption of the endogenous LP polypeptide-encoding gene; and b) observing or assaying said animal and/or animal tissues to detect changes in said physiological or pathological condition or conditions.
Various means for determining a compound's ability to modulate the activity of an LP polypeptide in the body of the transgenic animal are consistent with the invention. Observing the reversal of a pathological condition in the LP polypeptide expressing transgenic animal after administering a compound is one such means. Another more preferred means is to assay for markers of LP activity in the blood of a transgenic animal before and after administering an experimental compound to the animal. The level of skill of an artisan in the relevant arts readily provides the practitioner with numerous methods for assaying physiological changes related to therapeutic modulation of LP activity.
"Gene therapy" includes both conventional gene therapy, where a lasting effect is achieved by a single treatment, and the administration of gene therapeutic agents, which involves the one time or repeated administration of a therapeutically effective DNA or mRNA. Anti-sense RNAs and DNAs can be used as therapeutic agents for blocking the expression of certain genes in vivo. It has already been shown that short anti-sense oligonucleotides can be imported into cells where they act as inhibitors, despite their low intracellular concentrations caused by their restricted uptake by the cell membrane [Zamecnik, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad Sci. USA 83(12):4143-6 (1986)]. The oligonucleotides can be modified to enhance their uptake, e.g., by substituting their negatively charged phosphodiester groups with uncharged groups.
There are a variety of techniques available for introducing nucleic acids into viable cells. The techniques vary depending upon whether the nucleic acid is transferred into cultured cell in vitro or in vivo in the cells of the intended host. Techniques suitable for the transfer of nucleic acid into mammalian cells in vitro include the use of liposomes, electroporation, microinjection, cell fusion, DEAE-dextran, the calcium phosphate precipitation method, etc. The currently preferred in vivo gene transfer techniques include transfection with viral (typically, retroviral) vectors and viral coat protein- liposo e mediated transfection [Dzau, et al, Trends in Biotechnology 11(5):205-10 (1993)]. In some situations it is desirable to provide the nucleic acid source with an agent that targets the target cells, such as an antibody specific for a cell surface membrane protein or the target cell, a ligand for a receptor on the target cells, etc. Where liposomes are employed, proteins which bind to a cell surface membrane protein associated with endocytosis may by used for targeting and/or to facilitate uptake, e.g., capsid proteins or fragments thereof trophic for a particular cell type, antibodies for proteins which undergo internalization in cycling, proteins that target intracellular localization and enhance intracellular half-life. The technique of receptor-mediated endocytosis is described, for example, by Wu, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 262(10):4429-32 (1987); and Wagner, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87(9):3410-4 (1990). For a review of gene marking and gene therapy protocols, see Anderson, Science 256(5058):808-13 (1992).
The nucleic acid molecules encoding LP polypeptides or fragments thereof described herein are useful for chromosome identification. In this regard, there exists an ongoing need to idenfity new chromosome markers, since relatively few chromosome marking reagents, based upon actual sequence data, are presently available. Each LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid molecule of the present invention can be used as a chromosome marker. An LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid or fragments thereof can also be used for chromosomal localization of the gene encoding that LP polypeptide. The present invention further provides anti-LP polypeptide antibodies.
Exemplary antibodies include polyclonal, monoclonal, humanized, bispecific, and heteroconjugate antibodies.
The anti-LP polypeptide antibodies of the present invention may comprise polyclonal antibodies. Methods of preparing polyclonal antibodies are known to the skilled artisan. Polyclonal antibodies can be raised in a mammal, for example, by one or more injections of an immunizing agent and, if desired, an adjuvant. Typically, the immunizing agent and/or adjuvant will be injected in the mammal by multiple subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections. The immunizing agent may include the LP polypeptide or a fusion protein thereof. It may be useful to conjugate the immunizing agent to a protein known to be immunogenic in the mammal being immunized. Examples of such immunogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, and soybean trypsin inhibitor.
Examples of adjuvants which may be employed include Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose dicorynomycolate). The immunization protocol may be selected by one skilled in the art without undue experimentation. The anti-LP polypeptide antibodies may, alternatively, be monoclonal antibodies.
Monoclonal antibodies may be prepared using hybridoma methods, such as those described by Kohler and Milstein, N twre 256(5517):495-7 (1975). In a hybridoma method, a mouse, hamster, or other appropriate host animal is typically immunized with an immunizing agent to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the immunizing agent. Alternatively, the lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro.
The immunizing agent will typically include an LP polypeptide or a fusion protein thereof. Generally, either peripheral blood lymphocytes ("PBLs") are used, if cells of human origin are desired, or spleen cells or lymph node cells are used, if non-human mammalian sources are desired. The lymphocytes are then fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to form a hybridoma cell [Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, Academic Press, pp. 59- 103 (1986)]. Immortalized cell lines are usually transformed mammalian cells, particularly myeloma cells of rodent, bovine and human origin. Usually, rat or mouse myeloma cell lines are employed. The hybridoma cells may be cultured in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of the unfused, immortalized cells. For example, if the parental cells lack the enzyme hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT or HPRT), the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine ("HAT medium"), which prevents the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells. Preferred immortalized cell lines are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high level expression of antibody by the selected antibody-producing cells, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. More preferred immortalized cell lines are murine myeloma lines, which can be obtained, for instance, from the Salk Institute Cell Distribution Center, San Diego, CA, and the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Rockville, MD. Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies [Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133(6):3001-5 (1984); Brodeur, et al, Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., NY, pp. 51-63 (1987)].
The culture medium in which the hybridoma cells are cultured can then be assayed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed against an LP polypeptide. Preferably, the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies produced by the hybridoma cells is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radioimmunoassay (RIA) or enzyme-linked immunoabsorbent assay (ELISA). Such techniques and assays are known in the art. The binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson and Rodbard, Anal. Biochem. 107(l):220-39 ( 1980).
After the desired hybridoma cells are identified, the clones may be subcloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by standard methods [Goding, Monoclonal Antibodies: Principles and Practice, Academic Press, pp. 59-103 (1986)]. Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium and RPMI-1640 medium. Alternatively, the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites in a mammal.
The monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA methods, such as those described in U.S. Patent 4,816,567. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be readily isolated and sequenced using conventional procedures (e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies). The hybridoma cells of the invention serve as a preferred source of such DNA. Once isolated, the DNA may be placed into expression vectors, which are then transfected into host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. The DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for human heavy and light chain constant domains in place of the homologous murine sequences [U.S. Patent 4,816,567; Morrison, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 81 (21):6851-5 (1984)] or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a non- immunoglobulin polypeptide. Such a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide can be substituted for the constant domains of an antibody of the invention or can be substituted for the variable domains of one antigen-combining site of an antibody of the invention to create a chimeric bivalent antibody.
The antibodies may be monovalent antibodies. Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, one method involves recombinant expression of immunoglobulin light chain and modified heavy chain. The heavy chain is truncated generally at any point in the Fc region so as to prevent heavy chain crosslinking. Alternatively, the relevant cysteine residues are substituted with another amino acid residue or are deleted so as to prevent crosslinking.
In vitro methods are also suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
The anti-LP polypeptide antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized antibodies or human antibodies. Humanized forms of non-human (e.g., murine) antibodies are chimeric immunoglobulins, immunoglobulin chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab') or other antigen-binding subsequences of antibodies) which contain minimal sequence derived from non-human immunoglobulin. Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins (recipient antibody) in which residues from a complementary-determining region (CDR) of the recipient are replaced by residues from a CDR of a non-human species (donor antibody) such as mouse, rat or rabbit having the desired specificity, affinity and capacity. In some instances, Fv framework residues of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by corresponding non- human residues. Humanized antibodies may also comprise residues which are found neither in the recipient antibody nor in the imported CDR or framework sequences. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and typically two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin, and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence. The humanized antibody optimally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin [Jones, et al, Nature 321 (6069):522-5 (1986); Riechmann, et al, Nature 332(6162):323-7 (1988); and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol 2:593-6 (1992)]. Methods for humanizing non-human antibodies are well known in the art.
Generally, a humanized antibody has one or more amino acid residues introduced into it from a source which is non-human. These non-human amino acid residues are often referred to as "import" residues, which are typically taken from an "import" variable domain. Humanization can be essentially performed following the method of Winter and co-workers [Jones, et al, Nature 321(6069):522-5 (1986); Riechmann, et al, Nature 332(6162):323-7 (1988); Verhoeyen, et al., Science 239(4847): 1534-6 (1988)], by substituting rodent CDRs or CDR sequences for the corresponding sequences of a human antibody. Accordingly, such "humanized" antibodies are chimeric antibodies (U.S. Patent 4,816,567) wherein substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species. In practice, humanized antibodies are typically human antibodies in which some CDR residues and possibly some FR residues are substituted by residues from analogous sites in rodent antibodies.
Human antibodies can also be produced using various techniques known in the art, including phage display libraries [Hoogenboom and Winter, J. Mol. Biol. 227(2):381- 8 (1992); Marks, et al, J. Mol. Biol 222(3):581 -97 (1991)]. The techniques of Cole, et al, and Boerner, et al, are also available for the preparation of human monoclonal antibodies (Cole, et al, Monoclonal Antibodies and Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, p. 77 (1985), and Boerner, et al, J. Immunol. 147(l):86-95 (1991)]. Similarly, human antibodies can be made by introducing human immunoglobulin loci into transgenic animals, e.g., mice in which the endogenous immunoglobulin genes have been partially or completely inactivated. Upon challenge, human antibody production is observed, which closely resembles that seen in humans in all respects, including gene rearrangement, assembly and antibody repertoire. This approach is described, for example, in U.S. Patents 5,545,807; 5,545,806; 5,569,825; 5,625,126; 5,633,425; 5,661 ,016, and in the following scientific publications: Marks, et al, Biotechnology 10(7):779-83 (1992); Lonberg, et al, Nature 368(6474):856-9 (1994); Morrison, Nature 368(6474):812-3 (1994); Fishwild, et al, Nature Biotechnology 14(7):845-51 (1996); Neuberger, Nature Biotechnology 14(7):826 (1996); Lonberg and Huszar, Int. Rev. Immunol. 13(l):65-93 (1995).
Bispecific antibodies are monoclonal, preferably human or humanized, antibodies that have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. In the present case, one of the binding specificities is for an LP polypeptide, the other one is for any other antigen, and preferably for a cell-surface protein or receptor or receptor subunit. Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art. Antibodies with more than two valencies are contemplated. For example, trispecific antibodies can be prepared [Tutt, et al, J Immunol. 147(l):60-9 (1991)].
Heteroconjugate antibodies are also within the scope of the present invention. Heteroconjugate antibodies are composed of two covalently joined antibodies. Such antibodies have, for example, been proposed to target immune system cells to unwanted cells [U.S. Patent 4,676,980], and for treatment of HIV infection [WO 91/00360; WO 92/20373]. It is contemplated that the antibodies may be prepared in vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents. For example, immunotoxins may be constructed using a disulfide exchange reaction or by forming a thioether bond. Examples of suitable reagents for this purpose include iminothiolate and methyl-4-mercaptobutyrimidate and those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent 4,676,980.
The invention also pertains to immunoconjugates comprising an antibody conjugated to a cytotoxic agent such as a chemotherapeutic agent, toxin (e.g., an enzymatically active toxin of bacterial, fungal, plant or animal origin, or fragments thereof, or a small molecule toxin), or a radioactive isotope (i.e., a radioconjugate). Conjugates of the antibody and cytotoxic agent are made using a variety of bifunctional protein coupling agents such as N-succinimidyl-3-(2-pyridyldithiol) propionate (SPDP), iminothiolane (IT), bifunctional derivatives of imidoesters (such as dimethyl adipimidate HCL), active esters (such as disuccinimidyl suberate), aldehydes (such as glutaraldehyde), bis-azido compounds, bis-diazonium derivatives (such as bis-2- diazoniumbenzoyl)-ethylenediamine) diisocyanates (such as tolylene-2,6-diisocyanate), and bioactive fluorine compounds. For example, a ricin immunotoxin can be prepared as described in Vitetta, et al, Science 238(4830):1098-104 (1987). Carbon- 14-labeled 1- isothiocyanatobenzyl-3-methyldiethylene triaminepentaacetic acid (MX-DTPA) is an exemplary chelating agent for conjugation of radionucleotide to the antibody.
In another embodiment, the antibody may be conjugated to a "receptor" (such as streptavidin) for utilization in tumor pretargeting wherein the antibody-receptor conjugate is administered to the patient, followed by removal of unbound conjugate from the circulation using a clearing agent, and then administration of a "ligand" (e.g., avidin) which is conjugated to a cytotoxic agent (e.g., a radionucleotide).
The antibodies disclosed herein may also be formulated as immunoliposomes. Liposomes containing the antibody are prepared by methods known in the art, such as described in Eppstein, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 82:3688-92 (1985); Hwang, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 77(7):4030-4 (1980); and U.S. Patents 4,485,045 and 4,544,545. Liposomes with enhanced circulation time are disclosed in U.S. Patent 5,013,556.
Particularly useful liposomes can be generated by the reverse phase evaporation method with a lipid composition comprising phosphatidylcholine, cholesterol and PEG- derivatized phosphatidylethanolamine (PEG-PE). Liposomes are extruded through filters of defined pore size to yield liposomes with the desired diameter. Fab' fragments of the antibody of the present invention can be conjugated to the liposomes as described in Martin, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 257(l):286-8 (1982) via a disulfide interchange reaction. A chemotherapeutic agent (such as Doxorubicin) is optionally contained within the liposome. See Gabizon, et al, J. National Cancer Inst. 81(19):484-8 ( 1989).
Antibodies specifically binding an LP polypeptide identified herein, as well as other molecules identified by the screening assays disclosed hereinbefore, can be administered for the treatment of various disorders in the form of pharmaceutical compositions.
If an LP polypeptide is intracellular and whole antibodies are used as inhibitors, internalizing antibodies are preferred. However, lipofections or liposomes can also be used to deliver the antibody or an antibody fragment into cells. Where antibody fragments are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment that specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is preferred. For example, based upon the variable-region sequences of an antibody, peptide molecules can be designed that retain the ability to bind the target protein sequence. Such peptides can be synthesized chemically and/or produced by recombinant DNA technology. See, e.g., Marasco, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90(16):7889-93 (1993).
The formulation herein may also contain more than one active compound as necessary for the particular indication being treated, preferably those with complementary activities that do not adversely affect each other. Alternatively, or in addition, the composition may comprise an agent that enhances its function, such as, for example, a cytotoxic agent, cytokines, chemotherapeutic agent, or growth-inhibitory agent. Such molecules are suitable present in combination in amounts that are effective for the purpose intended. The active ingredients may also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly- (methylmethacrylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles, and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences 16th edition (1980).
The formulations to be used for in vivo administration must be sterile. This is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes.
Sustained-release preparations may be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained- release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the antibody, which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels (for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol), polylactides (U.S. Patent 3,773,919), copolymers of L-glutamic acid gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate, non- degradable ethylene-vinylacetate, degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as the LUPRON DEPOT™ (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate), and poly-D-(-)3-hydroxylbutyric acid. While polymers such as ethylene-vinyl acetate and lactic acid-glycolic acid enable release of molecules for over 100 days, certain hydrogels release proteins for shorter time periods. When encapsulated antibodies remain in the body for a long time, they may denature or aggregate as a result of exposure to moisture at 37 degrees C, resulting in a loss of biological activity and possible changes in immunogenicity. Rational strategies can be devised for stabilization depending on the mechanisms involved. For example, if the aggregation mechanism is discovered to be intermolecular S-S bond formation through thiosulfide interchange, stabilization may be achieved by modifying sulfhydryl residues, lyophilizing from acidic solutions, controlling moisture content, using appropriate additives, and developing specific polymer matrix compositions. The anti-LP polypeptide antibodies of the present invention have various utilities.
For example, such antibodies may be used in diagnostic assays for LP polypeptide expression, e.g., detecting expression in specific cells, tissues, or serum. Various diagnostic assay techniques known in the art may be used, such as competitive binding assays, direct or indirect sandwich assays and immunoprecipitation assays conducted in either heterogeneous or homogeneous phases [Zola, Monoclonal Antibodies.A Manual of Techniques, CRC Press, Inc., pp. 147-158 (1987)]. The antibodies used in the assays can be labeled with a detectable moiety. The detectable moiety should be capable of producing, either directly or indirectly, a detectable signal. For example, the detectable moiety may be a radioisotope, such as 3H, 1 C, 2P, 35S, or 125I, a fluorescent or chemiluminescent compound, such as fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, or luciferin, or an enzyme, such as alkaline phosphatase, beta-galactosidase or horseradish peroxidase. Any method known in the art for conjugating the antibody to the detectable moiety may be employed, including those methods described by Hunter, et al, Nature 144:945 (1962); David, et al, Biochemistry 13(5): 1014-21 ( 1974); Pain, et al, J Immunol. Meth., 40(2):219-30 (1981); and Nygren, J. Histochem. Cytochem. 30(5):407-12 (1982). Anti-LP polypeptide antibodies also are useful for affinity purification from recombinant cell culture or natural sources. In this process, the antibodies are immobilized on a suitable support, such a Sephadex resin or filter paper, using methods well known in the art. The immobilized antibody is then contacted with a sample containing the LP polypeptide to be purified, and thereafter the support is washed with a suitable solvent that will remove substantially all the material in the sample except the LP polypeptide, which is bound to the immobilized antibody. Finally, the support is washed with another suitable solvent that will release the desired polypeptide from the antibody. This invention encompasses methods of screening compounds to identify those that mimic the activity of the LP polypeptide (agonists) disclosed herein or prevent the effects of the LP polypeptide (antagonists). Screening assays for antagonist drug candidates are designed to identity compounds that bind or complex with an LP polypeptide encoded by the genes identified herein or otherwise interfere with the interaction of LP polypeptides with other cellular proteins. Such screening assays will include assays amenable to high-throughput screening of chemical libraries, making them particularly suitable for identifying small molecule drug candidates. The assays can be performed in a variety of formats. In binding assays, the interaction is binding, and the complex formed can be isolated or detected in the reaction mixture. In a particular embodiment, an LP polypeptide encoded by a gene identified herein or the drug candidate is immobilized on a solid phase, e.g., on a microtiter plate, by covalent or non-covalent attachments. Non-covalent attachment generally is accomplished by coating the solid surface with a solution comprising LP polypeptide and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody, e.g., a monoclonal antibody, specific for the polypeptide to be immobilized can be used to anchor it to a solid surface. The assay is performed by adding the non-immobilized component, which may be labeled by a detectable label, to the immobilized component, e.g., the coated surface containing the anchored component. When the reaction is complete, the non-reacted components are removed, e.g., by washing, and complexes anchored on the solid surface are detected. When the originally non-immobilized component carries a detectable label, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexing occurred. Where the originally non-immobilized component does not carry a label, complexing can be detected, for example, by using a labeled antibody specifically binding the immobilized complex.
If the candidate compound interacts with but does not bind to an LP polypeptide, its interaction with that polypeptide can be assayed by methods well known for detecting protein-protein interactions. Such assays include traditional approaches, such as, e.g., cross-linking, co-immunoprecipitation, and co-purification through gradients or chromatographic columns. In addition, protein-protein interactions can be monitored through gradients or chromatographic columns. In addition, protein-protein interactions can be monitored by using a yeast-based genetic system described by Fields and co- workers [Fields and Song, Nature 340(6230):245-6 (1989); Chien, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88(21):9578-82 (1991); Chevray and Nathans, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89(13):5789-93 (1992)]. Many transcriptional activators, such as yeast GAL4, consist of two physically discrete modular domains, one acting as the DNA-binding domain, while the other functions as the transcription-activation domain. The yeast expression system described in the foregoing publications (generally referred to as the "two-hybrid system") takes advantage of this property, and employs two hybrid proteins, one in which the target protein is fused to the DNA-binding domain of GAL4, and another in which candidate activating proteins are fused to the activation domain. The expression of GALl-lacZ reporter gene under control of a GAL4-activated promoter depends on reconstitution of GAL4 activity via protein-protein interaction. Colonies containing interacting polypeptides are detected with chromogenic substrate for beta- galactosidase. A complete kit (MATCHMAKER™) for identifying protein-protein interactions between two specific proteins using the two-hybrid technique is commercially available from Clontech. This system can also be extended to map protein domains involved in specific protein interactions as well as to pinpoint amino acid residues that are crucial for these interactions.
Compounds that interfere with the interaction of an LP polypeptide identified herein and other intra- or extracellular components can be tested as follows: usually a reaction mixture is prepared containing the product of the gene and the intra- or extracellular component under conditions and for a time allowing for the interaction and binding of the two products. To test the ability of a candidate compound to inhibit binding, the reaction is run in the absence and in the presence of the test compound. In addition, a placebo may be added to a third reaction mixture to serve as a positive control. The binding (complex formation) between the test compound and the intra- or extracellular component present in the mixture is monitored as described hereinabove. The formation of a complex in the control reaction(s) but not in the reaction mixture containing the test compound indicates that the test compound interferes with the interaction of the test compound and its reaction partner.
Antagonists may be detected by combining at least one LP polypeptide and a potential antagonist with a membrane-bound or recombinant receptor for that LP polypeptide under appropriate conditions for a competitive inhibition assay. The LP polypeptide can be labeled, such as by radioactivity, such that the number of LP polypeptide molecules bound to the receptor can be used to determine the effectiveness of the potential antagonist. The gene encoding the receptor for an LP polypeptide can be identified by numerous methods known to those of skill in the art, for example, ligand panning and FACS sorting. See Coligan, et al, Current Protocols in Immunology l(2):Ch. 5 (1991). Preferably, expression cloning is employed such that polyadenylated mRNA is prepared from a cell responsive to the secreted form of a particular LP polypeptide, and a cDNA library created from this mRNA is divided into pools and used to transfect COS cells or other cells that are not responsive to the secreted LP polypeptide. Transfected cells that are grown on glass slides are exposed to the labeled LP polypeptide. The LP polypeptide can be labeled by a variety of means including iodination or inclusion of a recognition site for a site-specific protein kinase. Following fixation and incubation, the slides are subjected to autoradiographic analysis. Positive pools are identified and sub-pools are prepared and re-transfected using an interactive sub-pooling and re-screening process, eventually yielding a single clone that encodes the putative receptor.
As an alternative approach for receptor identification, a labeled LP polypeptide can be photoaffinity-linked with cell membrane or extract preparations that express the receptor molecule. Cross-linked material is resolved by PAGE and exposed to X-ray film. The labeled complex containing the receptor can be excised, resolved into peptide fragments, and subjected to protein micro-sequencing. The amino acid sequence obtained from micro-sequencing would be used to design a set of degenerate oligonucleotide probes to screen a cDNA library to identify the gene encoding the putative receptor.
In another assay for antagonists, mammalian cells or a membrane preparation expressing the receptor would be incubated with a labeled LP polypeptide in the presence of the candidate compound. The ability of the compound to enhance or block this interaction could then be removed. Alternatively, a potential antagonist may be a closely related protein, for example, a mutated form of the LP polypeptide that recognizes the receptor but imparts no effect, thereby competitively inhibiting the action of the polypeptide.
Another potential LP antagonist is an anti-sense RNA or DNA construct prepared using anti-sense technology, where, e.g., an anti-sense RNA or DNA molecule acts to block directly the translation of mRNA by hybridizing to targeted mRNA and prevent its translation into protein. Anti-sense technology can be used to control gene expression through triple-helix formation or anti-sense DNA or RNA, both of which methods are based on binding of a polynucleotide to DNA or RNA. For example, the 5' coding portion of the polynucleotide sequence, which encodes the mature form of an LP polypeptide can be used to design an anti-sense RNA oligonucleotide sequence of about 10 to 40 base pairs in length. A DNA oligonucleotide is designed to be complementary to a region of the gene involved in transcription [triple helix; see Lee, et al, Nucl. Acids Res 6(9):3073-91 (1979); Cooney, et al, Science 241(4864):456-9 (1988); Beal and Dervan, Science 251(4999): 1360-3 (1991)], thereby preventing transcription and production of the LP polypeptide. The anti-sense RNA oligonucleotide hybridizes to the mRNA in vivo and blocks translation of the mRNA molecules [anti-sense; see Okano, J. Neurochem. 56(2):560-7 (1991 ); Oligodeoxynucleotides as Anti-sense Inhibitors of Gene Expression (CRC Press: Boca Raton, FL 1988)]. The oligonucleotides described above can also be delivered to cells such that the anti-sense RNA or DNA may be expressed in vivo to inhibit production of the LP polypeptide. When anti-sense DNA is used, oligodeoxyribonucleotides derived from the translation-initiation site, e.g., between about -10 and +10 positions of the target gene nucleotide sequence, are preferred.
Potential antagonists include small molecules that bind to the active site, the receptor binding site, or growth factor or other relevant binding site of the LP polypeptide, thereby blocking the normal biological activity of the LP polypeptide. Examples of small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide- like molecules, preferably soluble peptides, and synthetic non-peptidyl organic or inorganic compounds.
Ribozymes are enzymatic RNA molecules capable of catalyzing the specific cleavage of RNA. Ribozymes act by sequence-specific hybridization to the complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Specific ribozyme cleavage sites within a potential RNA target can be identified by known techniques. For further details, see, e.g., Rossi, Current Biology 4(5):469-71 (1994) and PCT publication No. WO 97/33551 (published September 18, 1997).
Nucleic acid molecules in triple-helix formation used to inhibit transcription should be single-stranded and composed of deoxynucleotides. The base composition of these oligonucleotides is designed such that it promotes triple-helix formation via
Hoogsteen base-pairing rules, which generally require sizeable stretches of purines or pyrimidines on one strand of a duplex. For further details see, e.g., PCT publication No. WO 97/33551, supra.
Another use of the compounds of the invention (e.g., LP polypeptides, fragments and variants thereof and LP antibodies directed thereto) described herein is to help diagnose whether a disorder is driven to some extent by the modulation of signaling by an LP polypeptide
A diagnostic assay to determine whether a particular disorder is driven by LP polypeptide dependent signaling can be carried out using the following steps: a) culturing test cells or tissues expressing an LP polypeptide; b) administering a compound which can inhibit LP polypeptide dependent signaling; and c) measuring LP polypeptide mediated phenotypic effects in the test cells. The steps can be carried out using standard techniques in light of the present disclosure. Appropriate controls take into account the possible cytotoxic effect of a compound, such as treating cells not associated with a cell proliferative disorder (e.g., confrol cells) with a test compound and can also be used as part of the diagnostic assay. The diagnostic methods of the invention involve the screening for agents that modulate the effects of LP polypeptide-associated disorders.
The LP polypeptides or antibodies thereto as well as LP polypeptide antagonists or agonists can be employed as therapeutic agents. Such therapeutic agents are formulated according to known methods to prepare pharmaceutically useful compositions, whereby the LP polypeptide or antagonist or agonist thereof is combined in a mixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
In the case of LP polypeptide antagonistic or agonistic antibodies, if the LP polypeptide is intracellular and whole antibodies are used as inhibitors, internalizing antibodies are preferred. However, lipofections or liposomes can also be used to deliver the antibody, or an antibody fragment, into cells. Where antibody fragments are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment which specifically binds to the binding domain of the target protein is preferred. For example, based upon the variable region sequences of an antibody, peptide molecules can be designed which retain the ability to bind the target protein sequence. Such peptides can be synthesized chemically and/or produced by reco binant DNA technology [see, e.g., Marasco, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90(16):7889-93 (1993)].
Therapeutic formulations are prepared for storage by mixing the active ingredient having the desired degree of purity with optional pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, excipients or stabilizers [Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences 16th edition (1980)], in the form of lyophilized formulations or aqueous solutions.
The formulation herein may also contain more than one active compound as necessary for the particular indication being treated, preferably those with complementary activities that do not adversely affect each other. Such molecules are suitably present in combination in amounts that are effective for the purpose intended. The active ingredients may also be entrapped in microcapsules prepared, for example, by coacervation techniques or by interfacial polymerization, for example, hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules and poly-(methylmethacrylate) microcapsules, respectively, in colloidal drug delivery systems (for example, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nano-particles and nanocapsules) or in macroemulsions. Such techniques are disclosed in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, supra.
The formulations to be used for in vivo administration must be sterile. This is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes. Therapeutic compositions herein generally are placed into a container having a sterile access port, for example, and intravenous solution bag or vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle.
Sustained-release preparations may be prepared. Suitable examples of sustained- release preparations include semipermeable matrices of solid hydrophobic polymers containing the therapeutic agent(s), which matrices are in the form of shaped articles, e.g., films, or microcapsules. Examples of sustained-release matrices include polyesters, hydrogels [for example, poly(2-hydroxyethyl-methacrylate), or poly(vinylalcohol)], polylactides, copolymers of L-glutamic acid and gamma-ethyl-L-glutamate, non- degradable ethylene-vinyl acetate, degradable lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymers such as the LUPRON DEPOT™ (injectable microspheres composed of lactic acid-glycolic acid copolymer and leuprolide acetate), and poly-D-(-)-3-hydroxybutyric acid. Microencapsulation of recombinant proteins for sustained release has been successfully performed with human growth hormone (rhGH), interferon, and interleukin-2. Johnson, et al, Nat. Med. 2(7):795-9 (1996); Yasuda, et al, Biomed. Ther. 27:1221-3 (1993); Hora, et al, Bio/Technology 8(8):755-8 (1990); Cleland, "Design and Production of Single Immunization Vaccines Using Polylactide Polyglycolide Microsphere Systems" in Vaccine Design: The Subunit and Adjuvant Approach, Powell and Newman, Eds.,
Plenum Press, NY, 1995, pp. 439-462 WO 97/03692; WO 96/40072; WO 96/07399; and U.S. Patent 5,654,010.
The sustained-release formulations of these proteins may be developed using polylactic-coglycolic acid (PLGA) polymer due to its biocompatibility and wide range of biodegradable properties. The degradation products of PLGA, lactic and glycolic acids, can be cleared quickly within the human body. Moreover, the degradability of this polymer can be adjusted from months to years depending on its molecular weight and composition. See Lewis, "Controlled release of bioactive agents from lactide/glycolide polymer" in Biodegradable Polymers as Drug Delivery Systems (Marcel Dekker; New York, 1990), M. Chasin and R. Langer (Eds.) pp. 1-41.
While polymers such as ethylene-vinyl acetate and lactic acid-glycolic acid enable release of molecules for over 100 days, certain hydrogels release proteins for shorter time periods. When encapsulated antibodies remain in the body for a long time, they may denature or aggregate as a result of exposure to moisture at 37 degrees C, resulting in a loss of biological activity and possible changes in immunogenicity.
It is contemplated that the compounds, including, but not limited to, antibodies, small organic and inorganic molecules, peptides, anti-sense molecules, ribozymes, etc., of the present invention may be used to treat various conditions including those characterized by overexpression and/or activation of the disease-associated genes identified herein. The active agents of the present invention (e.g., antibodies, polypeptides, nucleic acids, ribozymes, small organic or inorganic molecules) are administered to a mammal, preferably a human, in accord with known methods, such as intravenous administration as a bolus or by continuous infusion over a period of time, by intramuscular, intraperitoneal, intracerebral, intracerobrospinal, subcutaneous, intra- articular, intrasynovial, intrathecal, intraoccular, intralesional, oral, topical, inhalation, pulmonary, and/or through sustained release. Other therapeutic regimens may be combined with the administration of LP polypeptide antagonists or antagonists, anti-cancer agents, e.g., antibodies of the instant invention.
For the prevention or treatment of disease, the appropriate dosage of an active agent, (e.g., an antibody, polypeptide, nucleic acid, ribozyme, or small organic or inorganic molecule) will depend on the type of disease to be treated, as defined above, the severity and course of the disease, whether the agent is administered for preventive or therapeutic purposes, previous therapy, the patient's clinical history and response to the agent, and the discretion of the attending physician. The agent is suitably administered to the patient at one time or over a series of treatments.
Dosages and desired drug concentration of pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may vary depending on the particular use envisioned. The determination of the appropriate dosage or route of administration is well within the skill of an ordinary artisan. Animal experiments provide reliable guidance for the determination of effective does for human therapy. Interspecies scaling of effective doses can be performed following the principles laid down by Mordenti and Chappell, "The Use of Interspecies Scaling in Toxicokinetics," in Toxicokinetics and New Drug Development, Yacobi, et al, Eds., Pergamon Press, NY, p.4246 (1989).
When in vivo administration of a composition comprising an LP polypeptide, an LP polypeptide antibody, an LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid, ribozyme, or small organic or inorganic molecule is employed, normal dosage amounts may vary from about 1 ng/kg up to 100 mg/kg of mammal body weight or more per day, preferably about 1 pg/kg/day up to 100 mg/kg of mammal body weight or more per day, depending upon the route of administration. Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature; see, for example, U.S. Patents 4,657,760, 5,206,344 or 5,225,212. It is within the scope of the invention that different formulations will be effective for different treatment compounds and different disorders, that administration targeting one organ or tissue, for example, may necessitate delivery in a manner different from that to another organ or tissue. Moreover, dosages may be administered by one or more separate administrations or by continuous infusion. For repeated administrations over several days or longer, depending on the condition, the treatment is sustained until a desired suppression of disease symptoms occurs. However, other dosage regimens may be useful. The progress of this therapy is easily monitored by conventional techniques and assays.
In another embodiment of the invention, an article of manufacture containing materials useful for the diagnosis or treatment of the disorders described above is provided. The article of manufacture comprises a container and a label. Suitable containers include, for example, bottles, vials, syringes, and test tubes. The containers may be formed from a variety of materials such as glass or plastic. The container holds a composition which is effective for diagnosing or treating the condition and may have a sterile access port (for example, the container may be an intravenous solution bag or a vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermic injection needle). The active agent in the composition is typically an LP polypeptide, antagonist or agonist thereof. The label on, or associated with, the container indicates that the composition is used for diagnosing or treating the condition of choice. The article of manufacture may further comprise a second container comprising a pharmaceutically-acceptable buffer, such as phosphate- buffered saline, Ringer's solution and dextrose solution. It may further include other materials desirable from a commercial and user standpoint, including other buffers, diluents, filters, needles, syringes, and package inserts with instructions for use.
In another embodiment of the invention, therapeutic utility of the LP polypeptide is determined by measuring phosphorylation of tyrosine residues on specific cell lines. The early cellular response of cells stimulated with the majority of proteins is protein phosphorylation of the tyrosine residues. This response includes autophosphorylation of corresponding receptors, which thereby leads to the activation of catalytic properties and the initiation of intracellular pathways specific to the cell type. Moreover, signaling downstream of receptors requires phosphorylation of specific kinases inside the cell and other intracellular enzymes of different origin as well as the phosphorylation of multiple adapter/scaffold, structural proteins and transcriptional factors. Therefore, diverse protein-induced cell responses can be visualized by monitoring the state of protein phosphorylation after cell stimulation.
Immunodetection is used to detect the protein phosphorylation of the stimulated cell. Several antibodies that are directed against specific phosphorylated epitopes in signaling molecules are readily available. Two specific antibodies are used: phosphospecific anti-MAPK and anti-AKT antibodies. Additionally, non-specific anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies, which recognize tyrosine-phosphorylated proteins, are used. While anti-phosphotyrosine antibodies allow detection of diverse tyrosine phosphorylated proteins without directly addressing the nature of their identity, the phosphospecific anti-MAPK and anti-AKT antibodies recognize only the corresponding proteins in their phosphorylated form.
Another assay to determine utility of LP polypeptides involves transfection of cell lines with reporter plasmids followed by cell stimulation with an LP polypeptide. Each reporter consists of a defined element, responsive to specific intracellular signaling pathways, upstream of a sequence involving a reporter protein such as luciferase. Upon stimulation of the element, reporter transcription and translation ensues, and the resulting protein levels can be detected using an assay such as a luminescence assay. The cell stimulation period depends on the reporter plasmid used.
For each reporter used, positive controls are designed in the form of agonist cocktails which include approximately maximal stimulatory doses of several ligands known to stimulate the represented signaling pathway. Using this design, the chances of finding a positive stimulus for each cell line is maximized. The caveat, however, is that some cell line / reporter combinations will not be stimulated by the specific agonist cocktail, due to lack of an appropriate ligand in the cocktail. Alternately, the lack of signal induction by an agonist cocktail may be the lack of all signaling components within a particular cell line to activate the transcriptional element. Cell line / reporter combinations with no exogenous stimulus added make up the negative controls.
Another assay to determine utility of LP polypeptides involves transfection of cell lines with reporter plasmids followed by cell stimulation with an LP polypeptide. Each reporter consists of a defined element, responsive to specific intracellular signaling pathways, upstream of a sequence involving a reporter protein such as luciferase. Upon stimulation of the element, reporter transcription and translation ensues, and the resulting protein levels can be detected using an assay such as a luminescence assay. The cell stimulation period depends on the reporter plasmid used.
For each reporter used, positive controls are designed in the form of agonist cocktails which include approximately maximal stimulatory doses of several ligands known to stimulate the represented signaling pathway. Using this design, the chances of finding a positive stimulus for each cell line is maximized. The caveat, however, is that some cell line/reporter combinations will not be stimulated by the specific agonist cocktail, due to lack of an appropriate ligand in the cocktail. Alternately, the lack of signal induction by an agonist cocktail may be the lack of all signaling components within a particular cell line to activate the transcriptional element. Cell line / reporter combinations with no exogenous stimulus added make up the negative controls.
In another assay, utility of LP polypeptide is determined by proliferation of cells. In this assay, gross changes in the number of cells remaining in a culture are monitored after exposure to an LP polypeptide for three days. The cells are incubated in an appropriate assay medium to produce a sub-optimal growth rate. For example, usually a 1 :10 or 1 :20 dilution of normal culture medium results in a 40 to 60% reduction in cell number compared to the undiluted culture medium. This broad growth zone is chosen so that if an LP polypeptide is a stimulator of growth, the cells have room to expand, and conversely, if the LP polypeptide is deleterious, a reduction in cell density can be detected. After a period of exposure, the assay media is replaced with media containing a detection agent such as Calcein AM, a membrane-permeant fluorescent dye, allowing quantification of the cell number.
For use in another assay, a FLAG-HIS (FLIS)-tagged version of the LP polypeptide is expressed using mammalian cells such as HEK-293EBNA, COS-7, or HEK293T. The coding region of the cDNA is amplified by PCR of a vector containing a fragment encoding the LP polypeptide. The PCR-generated fragment is cleaved with restriction enzymes and gel-purified. The fragment is then ligated into a mammalian expression vector containing the FLIS epitope tag fused to the C-terminus. Protein expressed by this plasmid construct includes both the FLAG tag (Asp-Tyr-Lys-Asp-Asp- Asp-Asp-Lys) and the 6X His tag at the COOH -terminus of the protein. This tag provides epitopes for commercially available tag-specific antibodies, enabling detection of the protein.
To determine expression of the LP polypeptide in tissues, a protein-binding assay is performed. The fixed tissue sample is exposed to the FLIS-tagged LP polypeptide, followed by exposure to a primary antibody and a secondary antibody containing a fluorescent dye. Tagged LP polypeptide that binds to the antigens in the tissue will fluoresce. Binding of the protein to an antigen in the tissue suggests that the protein is expressed in that tissue. Thus, protein expression can be determined by measuring which tissues fluoresce.
Having generally described the invention, the same will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are provided by way of illustration and are not intended as limiting.
EXAMPLES
Example 1 Expression and Purification of LP polypeptides in E. coli The bacterial expression vector pQE60 is used for bacterial expression in this example. (QIAGEN, Inc., Chatsworth, CA). pQE60 encodes ampicillin antibiotic resistance ("Ampr") and contains a bacterial origin of replication ("ori"), an IPTG inducible promoter, a ribosome binding site ("RBS"), six codons encoding histidine residues that allow affinity purification using nickel-nitrilo-triacetic acid ("Ni-NTA") affinity resin sold by QIAGEN, Inc., and suitable single restriction enzyme cleavage sites. These elements are arranged such that a DNA fragment encoding a polypeptide can be inserted in such a way as to produce that polypeptide with the six His residues (i.e., a "6 X His tag") covalently linked to the carboxyl terminus of that polypeptide. However, a polypeptide coding sequence can optionally be inserted such that translation of the six His codons is prevented and, therefore, a polypeptide is produced with no 6 X His tag.
The nucleic acid sequence encoding the desired portion of an LP polypeptide lacking the hydrophobic leader sequence is amplified from a cDNA clone using PCR oligonucleotide primers (based on the sequences presented, e.g., in SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, or 9) which anneal to the amino terminal encoding DNA sequences of the desired portion of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid and to sequences in the construct 3' to the cDNA coding sequence. Additional nucleotides containing restriction sites to facilitate cloning in the pQE60 vector are added to the 5' and 3' sequences, respectively.
For cloning, the 5' and 3' primers have nucleotides corresponding or complementary to a portion of the coding sequence of the LP polypeptide-encoding nucleic acid, e.g., as presented in SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to known method steps. One of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate, of course, that the point in a polynucleotide sequence where the 5' primer begins can be varied to amplify a desired portion of the complete polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide shorter or longer than the polynucleotide which encodes the mature form of the polypeptide.
The amplified nucleic acid fragments and the vector pQE60 are digested with appropriate restriction enzymes, and the digested DNAs are then ligated together.
Insertion of the LP polypeptide-encoding DNA into the restricted pQE60 vector places the LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, or LP401 polypeptide coding region including its associated stop codon downstream from the IPTG-inducible promoter and in-frame with an initiating AUG codon. The associated stop codon prevents translation of the six histidine codons downstream of the insertion point.
The ligation mixture is transformed into competent E. coli cells using standard procedures such as those described in Sambrook, et al, 1989; Ausubel, 1987-1998. E. coli strain M15/rep4, containing multiple copies of the plasmid pREP4, which expresses the lac repressor and confers kanamycin resistance ("Kanr"), is used in carrying out the illustrative example described herein. This strain, which is only one of many that are suitable for expressing LP polypeptides, is available commercially from QIAGEN, Inc. Transformants are identified by their ability to grow on LB plates in the presence of ampicillin and kanamycin. Plasmid DNA is isolated from resistant colonies and the identity of the cloned DNA confirmed by restriction analysis, PCR and DNA sequencing. Clones containing the desired constructs are grown overnight ("O/N") in liquid culture in LB media supplemented with both ampicillin (100 μg/mL) and kanamycin (25 μg/mL). The O/N culture is used to inoculate a large culture, at a dilution of approximately 1 :25 to 1 :250. The cells are grown to an optical density at 600 nm ("OD600") of between 0.4 and 0.6. Isopropyl-beta-D-thiogalactopyranoside ("IPTG") is then added to a final concentration of 1 mM to induce transcription from the lac repressor sensitive promoter, by inactivating the lad repressor. Cells subsequently are incubated further for three to four hours. Cells then are harvested by centrifugation.
The cells are then stirred for three to four hours at 4 °C in 6 M guanidine hydrochloride, pH 8. The cell debris is removed by centrifugation, and the supernatant containing the LP polypeptide is dialyzed against 50 mM sodium acetate buffer, pH 6, supplemented with 200 mM sodium chloride. Alternatively, a polypeptide can be successfully refolded by dialyzing it against 500 mM sodium chloride, 20% glycerol, 25 mM Tris hydrochloride, pH 7.4, containing protease inhibitors.
If insoluble protein is generated, the protein is made soluble according to known method steps. After renaturation, the polypeptide is purified by ion exchange, hydrophobic interaction, and size exclusion chromatography. Alternatively, an affinity chromatography step such as an antibody column is used to obtain pure LP polypeptide. The purified polypeptide is stored at 4 degrees C or frozen at negative 40 degrees C to negative 120 degrees C.
Example 2
Cloning and Expression of LP polypeptides in a Baculovirus Expression System In this example, the plasmid shuttle vector pA2 GP is used to insert the cloned DNA encoding the mature LP polypeptide into a baculovirus, using a baculovirus leader and standard methods as described in Summers, et al, A Manual of Methods for Baculovirus Vectors and Insect Cell Culture Procedures, Texas Agricultural
Experimental Station Bulletin No. 1555 (1987). This expression vector contains the strong polyhedrin promoter of the Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcMNPV) followed by the secretory signal peptide (leader) of the baculovirus gp67 polypeptide and convenient restriction sites such as BamHI, Xba I, and Asp718. The polyadenylation site of the simian virus 40 ("SV40") is used for efficient polyadenylation. For easy selection of recombinant virus, the plasmid contains the beta-galactosidase gene from E. coli under control of a weak Drosophila promoter in the same orientation, followed by the polyadenylation signal of the polyhedrin gene. The inserted genes are flanked on both sides by viral sequences for cell-mediated homologous recombination with wild-type viral DNA to generate viable virus that expresses the cloned polynucleotide.
Other baculovirus vectors are used in place of the vector above, such as pAc373, pVL941 and pAcIMl, as one skilled in the art would readily appreciate, as long as the construct provides appropriately located signals for transcription, translation, secretion and the like, including a signal peptide and an in-frame AUG as required. Such vectors are described, for instance, in Luckow, et al, Virology 170:31-39 (1989). The cDNA sequence encoding the mature LP polypeptide in a clone, lacking the AUG initiation codon and the naturally associated nucleotide binding site, is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3' sequences of the gene. Non-limiting examples include 5' and 3' primers having nucleotides corresponding or complementary to a portion of the coding sequence of an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, e.g., as presented in SEQ ID NO:l, 3, 5, 7, or 9 according to known method steps.
The amplified fragment is isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit (e.g., "Geneclean," BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, CA). The fragment is then digested with the appropriate restriction enzyme and again is purified on a 1% agarose gel. This fragment is designated herein "FI ."
The plasmid is digested with the corresponding restriction enzymes and optionally, can be dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase, using routine procedures known in the art. The DNA is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel using a commercially available kit ("Geneclean" BIO 101 Inc., La Jolla, CA). This vector DNA is designated herein "VI."
Fragment FI and the dephosphorylated plasmid VI are ligated together with T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB101 or other suitable E. coli hosts such as XL-1 Blue (Strata gene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, CA) cells are transformed with the ligation mixture and spread on culture plates. Bacteria are identified that contain the plasmid bearing a human LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide using the PCR method, in which one of the primers that is used to amplify the gene and the second primer is from well within the vector so that only those bacterial colonies containing an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide will show amplification of the DNA. The sequence of the cloned fragment is confirmed by DNA sequencing. The resulting plasmid is designated herein as pBacLP.
Five μg of the plasmid pBacLP plasmid construct is co-transfected with 1.0 μg of a commercially available linearized baculovirus DNA ("BaculoGold baculovirus DNA", PharMingen, San Diego, CA), using the lipofection method described by Feigner, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84: 7413-7 (1987). 1 μg of BaculoGold® virus DNA and 5 μg of the plasmid pBacLP are mixed in a sterile well of a microtiter plate containing 50 μL of serum-free Grace's medium (Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD). Afterwards, 10 μL Lipofectin plus 90 μL Grace's medium are added, mixed and incubated for fifteen minutes at room temperature. Then, the transfection mixture is added drop-wise to Sf9 insect cells (ATCC CRL 171 1) seeded in a 35 mm tissue culture plate with 1 mL Grace's medium without serum. The plate is rocked back and forth to mix the newly added solution. The plate is then incubated for five hours at 27 degrees C. After five hours, the transfection solution is removed from the plate and 1 mL of Grace's insect medium supplemented with 10% fetal calf serum is added. The plate is put back into an incubator and cultivation is continued at 27 degrees C for four days.
After four days, the supernatant is collected, and a plaque assay is performed. An agarose gel with "Blue Gal" (Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD) is used to allow easy identification and isolation of gal-expressing clones, which produce blue- stained plaques. (A detailed description of a "plaque assay" of this type can also be found in the user's guide for insect cell culture and baculovirology distributed by Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD, pp. 9-10). After appropriate incubation, blue stained plaques are picked with a micropipettor tip (e.g., Eppendorf). The agar containing the recombinant viruses is then resuspended in a microcentrifuge tube containing 200 μL of Grace's medium and the suspension containing the recombinant baculovirus is used to infect Sf9 cells seeded in 35 mm dishes. Four days later, the supernatants of these culture dishes are harvested and then stored at 4 degrees C. To verify the expression of the LP polypeptide, Sf9 cells are grown in Grace's medium supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated FBS. The cells are infected with the recombinant baculovirus at a multiplicity of infection ("MOI") of about two. Six hours later, the medium is removed and replaced with SF900 II medium minus methionine and cysteine (available, e.g., from Life Technologies, Inc., Rockville, MD). If radiolabeled polypeptides are desired, 42 hours later, 5 mCi of 35S-methionine and 5 mCi 5S-cysteine (available from Amersham, Piscataway, NJ) are added. The cells are further incubated for sixteen hours and then harvested by centrifugation. The polypeptides in the supernatant as well as the intracellular polypeptides are analyzed by SDS-PAGE, followed by autoradiography (if radiolabeled). Microsequencing of the amino acid sequence of the amino terminus of purified polypeptide can be used to determine the amino terminal sequence of the mature polypeptide and, thus, the cleavage point and length of the secretory signal peptide. Example 3
Cloning and Expression of an LP Polypeptide in Mammalian Cells A typical mammalian expression vector contains at least one promoter element, which mediates the initiation of transcription of mRNA, the polypeptide coding sequence, and signals required for the termination of transcription and polyadenylation of the transcript. Additional elements include enhancers, Kozak sequences and intervening sequences flanked by donor and acceptor sites for RNA splicing. Highly efficient transcription can be achieved with the early and late promoters from SV40, the long terminal repeats (LTRS) from Retroviruses, e.g., RSV, HTLVI, HIVI and the early promoter of the cytomegalovirus (CMV). However, cellular elements can also be used (e.g., the human actin promoter). Suitable expression vectors for use in practicing the present invention include, for example, vectors such as pIRESlneo, pRetro-Off, pRetro- On, PLXSN, or pLNCX (Clontech Labs, Palo Alto, CA), pcDNA3.1 (+/-), pcDNA/Zeo (+/-) or pcDNA3.1/Hygro (+/-) (Invitrogen), PSVL and PMSG (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), pRSVcat (ATCC 37152), pSV2dhfr (ATCC 37146) and pBC12MI (ATCC 67109). Other suitable mammalian host cells include human Hela 293, H9, Jurkat cells, mouse NIH3T3, C127 cells, Cos 1, Cos 7 and CV 1 , quail QC1-3 cells, mouse L cells, and Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells. Alternatively, the gene is expressed in stable cell lines that contain the gene integrated into a chromosome. The co-transfection with a selectable marker such as DHRF (dihydrofolate reductase), GPT neomycin, or hygromycin allows the identification and isolation of the transfected cells.
The transfected gene can also be amplified to express large amounts of the encoded polypeptide. The DHFR marker is useful to develop cell lines that carry several hundred or even several thousand copies of the gene of interest. Another useful selection marker is the enzyme glutamine synthase (GS) [Murphy, et al, Biochem. J. 227:277-9 (1991); Bebbington, et al, Bio/Technology 10:169-75 (1992)]. Using these markers, the mammalian cells are grown in selective medium and the cells with the highest resistance are selected. These cell lines contain the amplified gene(s) integrated into a chromosome. Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) and NSO cells are often used for the production of polypeptides.
The expression vectors pCl and pC4 contain the strong promoter (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus [Cullen, et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:438-47 (1985)] plus a fragment of the CMV-enhancer [Boshart, et al, Cell 41 :521-30 (1985)]. Multiple cloning sites, e.g., with the restriction enzyme cleavage sites BamHI, Xbal, and Asp718, facilitate the cloning of the gene of interest. The vectors contain in addition the 3' intron, the polyadenylation and teπnination signal of the rat preproinsulin gene.
Example 3(a
Cloning and Expression in COS Cells The expression plasmid, pLP HA, is made by cloning a cDNA encoding LP polypeptide into the expression vector pcDNAI/Amp or pcDNAIII (which can be obtained from Invitrogen, Inc.). The expression vector pcDNAI/amp contains: (1) an E. coli origin of replication effective for propagation in E. coli and other prokaryotic cells; (2) an ampicillin resistance gene for selection of plasmid-containing prokaryotic cells; (3) an SV40 origin of replication for propagation in eukaryotic cells; (4) a CMV promoter, a polylinker, an SV40 intron; (5) several codons encoding a hemagglutinin fragment (i.e., an "HA" tag to facilitate purification) or HIS tag (see, e.g., Ausubel, supra) followed by a termination codon and polyadenylation signal arranged so that a cDNA can be conveniently placed under expression control of the CMV promoter and operably linked to the SV40 intron and the polyadenylation signal by means of restriction sites in the polylinker. The HA tag corresponds to an epitope derived from the influenza hemagglutinin polypeptide described by Wilson, et al, Cell 37:767-8 (1984). The fusion of the HA tag to the target polypeptide allows easy detection and recovery of the recombinant polypeptide with an antibody that recognizes the HA epitope. pcDNAIII contains, in addition, the selectable neomycin marker.
A DNA fragment encoding the LP polypeptide is cloned into the polylinker region of the vector so that recombinant polypeptide expression is directed by the CMV promoter. The plasmid construction strategy is as follows. The LP polypeptide-encoding cDNA of a clone is amplified using primers that contain convenient restriction sites, much as described above for construction of vectors for expression of LP polypeptides in E. coli. Non-limiting examples of suitable primers include those based on the coding sequences presented in SΕQ ID NO: l, 3, 5, 7, or 9.
The PCR amplified DNA fragment and the vector, pcDNAI/Amp, are digested with suitable restriction enzyme(s) and then ligated. The ligation mixture is transformed into E. coli strain SURE (available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, CA), and the transformed culture is plated on ampicillin media plates which then are incubated to allow growth of ampicillin resistant colonies. Plasmid DNA is isolated from resistant colonies and examined by restriction analysis or other means for the presence of the LP polypeptide-encoding fragment.
For expression of recombinant LP polypeptide, COS cells are transfected with an expression vector, as described above, using DEAE-DEXTRAN, as described, for instance, in Sambrook, et al, Molecular Cloning: a Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York (1989). Cells are incubated under conditions for expression of the LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide by the vector. Expression of the LP polypeptide-HA fusion is detected by radiolabeling and immunoprecipitation, using methods described in, for example Harlow, et al, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd Ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York (1988). To this end, two days after transfection, the cells are labeled by incubation in media containing 35S-cysteine for eight hours. The cells and the media are collected, and the cells are washed and lysed with detergent-containing RIPA buffer: 150 mM sodium chloride, 1% NP-40, 0.1% SDS, 0.5% DOC, 50 mM TRIS, pH 7.5, as described by Wilson, et al, cited above. Proteins are precipitated from the cell lysate and from the culture media using an HA-specific monoclonal antibody. The precipitated polypeptides then are analyzed by SDS-PAGE and autoradiography. An expression product of the expected size is seen in the cell lysate, which is not seen in negative controls.
Example 3(b) Cloning and Expression in CHO Cells The vector pC4 is used for the expression of the LP polypeptide. Plasmid pC4 is a derivative of the plasmid pSV2-dhfr (ATCC Accession No. 37146). The plasmid contains the mouse DHFR gene under control of the SV40 early promoter. Chinese hamster ovary cells or other cells lacking dihydrofolate activity that are transfected with these plasmids can be selected by growing the cells in a selective medium (alpha minus MEM, Life Technologies) supplemented with methotrexate. The amplification of the DHFR genes in cells resistant to methotrexate (MTX) has been well documented [see, e.g., Alt, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 253:1357-70 (1978); Hamlin and Ma, Biochem. et Biophys. Ada 1097:107-43 (1990); and Page and Sydenham, Biotechnology 9:64-8 (1991)]. Cells grown in increasing concentrations of MTX develop resistance to the drug by overproducing the target enzyme, DHFR, as a result of amplification of the DHFR gene. If a second gene is linked to the DHFR gene, it is usually co-amplified and over- expressed. It is known in the art that this approach can be used to develop cell lines carrying more than 1 ,000 copies of the amplified gene(s). Subsequently, when the methotrexate is withdrawn, cell lines are obtained which contain the amplified gene integrated into one or more chromosome(s) of the host cell.
Plasmid pC4 contains for expressing the gene of interest the strong promoter of the long terminal repeat (LTR) of the Rous Sarcoma Virus [Cullen, et al, Mol. Cell. Biol. 5: 438-47 (1985)] plus a fragment isolated from the enhancer of the immediate early gene of human cytomegalovirus (CMV) [Boshart, et al, Cell 41 : 521-30 (1985)]. Downstream of the promoter are BamHI, Xbal, and Asp718 restriction enzyme cleavage sites that allow integration of the genes. Behind these cloning sites, the plasmid contains the 3' intron and polyadenylation site of the rat preproinsulin gene. Other high efficiency promoters can also be used for the expression, e.g., the human beta-actin promoter, the SV40 early or late promoters or the long terminal repeats from other retroviruses, e.g., HIV and HTLVI. Clontech's Tet-Off and Tet-On gene expression systems and similar systems can be used to express the LP polypeptide in a regulated way in mammalian cells [Gossen, and Bujard, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:5547-51 (1992)]. For the polyadenylation of the mRNA other signals, e.g., from the human growth hormone or globin genes can be used as well. Stable cell lines carrying a gene of interest integrated into the chromosomes can also be selected upon co-transfection with a selectable marker such as gpt, G418 or hygromycin. It is advantageous to use more than one selectable marker in the beginning, e.g., G418 plus methotrexate. The plasmid pC4 is digested with restriction enzymes and then dephosphorylated using calf intestinal phosphatase by procedures known in the art. The vector is then isolated from a 1% agarose gel.
The DNA sequence encoding the complete the LP polypeptide is amplified using PCR oligonucleotide primers corresponding to the 5' and 3' sequences of the gene. Non- limiting examples include 5' and 3' primers having nucleotides corresponding or complementary to a portion of the coding sequences of an LP polypeptide-encoding polynucleotide, e.g., as presented in SEQ ID NO:l , 3, 5, 7, or 9, according to known method steps. The amplified fragment is digested with suitable endonucleases and then purified again on a 1% agarose gel. The isolated fragment and the dephosphorylated vector are then ligated with T4 DNA ligase. E. coli HB101 or XL-1 Blue cells are then transformed and bacteria are identified that contain the fragment inserted into plasmid pC4 using, for instance, restriction enzyme analysis. Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells lacking an active DHFR gene are used for transfection. Five μg of the expression plasmid pC4 is cotransfected with 0.5 μg of the plasmid pSV2-neo using lipofectin. The plasmid pSV2-neo contains a dominant selectable marker, the neo gene from Tn5 encoding an enzyme that confers resistance to a group of antibiotics including G418. The cells are seeded in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 1 μg/mL G418. After two days, the cells are trypsinized and seeded in hybridoma cloning plates (Greiner, Germany) in alpha minus MEM supplemented with 10, 25, or 50 ng/mL of methotrexate plus 1 μg/mL G418. After about ten to fourteen days, single clones are trypsinized and then seeded in six-well petri dishes or 10 mL flasks using different concentrations of methotrexate (50 nM, 100 nM, 200 nM, 400 nM, 800 nM). Clones growing at the highest concentrations of methotrexate are then transferred to new six-well plates containing even higher concentrations of methotrexate (1 mM, 2 mM, 5 mM, 10 mM, 20 mM). The same procedure is repeated until clones are obtained which grow at a concentration of 100 to 200 mM. Expression of the desired gene product is analyzed, for instance, by SDS-PAGE and Western blot or by reversed phase HPLC analysis. Example 4 Tissue Distribution of LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA Northern blot analysis is carried out to examine expression of LP -polypeptide mRNA in human tissues, using methods described by, among others, Sambrook, et al, cited above. A cDNA preferably probe encoding the entire LP polypeptide is labeled with 32P using the Rediprime™ DNA labeling system (Amersham Life Science), according to the manufacturer's instructions. After labeling, the probe is purified using a CHROMA SPIN- 100™ column (Clontech Laboratories, Inc.) according to the manufacturer's protocol number PT1200-1. The purified and labeled probe is used to examine various human tissues for LP polypeptide mRNA.
Multiple Tissue Northern (MTN) blots containing various human tissues (H) or human immune system tissues (IM) are obtained from Clontech and are examined with the labeled probe using ExpressHyb™ hybridization solution (Clontech) according to manufacturer's protocol number PT1 190-1. Following hybridization and washing, the blots are mounted, exposed to film at negative 70 degrees C overnight, and developed according to standard procedures.
Example 5 Protein Phosphorylation on Tyrosine Residues Protein-induced cell responses are determined by monitoring tyrosine phosphorylation upon stimulation of cells by addition of LP polypeptides. This is accomplished in two steps: cell manipulation and immunodetection.
Protein phosphorylation is measured using the SK-N-MC neuroblastoma cell line (ATCC HTB-10). On day one, the cells are plated into poly-D-lysine-coated, 96 well plates containing cell propagation medium [DMEM:F12 (3:1), 20 mM HEPES at pH 7.5, 5% FBS, and 50 μg/mL Gentamicin]. The cells are seeded at a concentration of 20,000 cells per well in 100 μL medium. On day two, the propagation medium in each well is replaced with 100 μL starvation medium containing DMEM:F12 (3:1), 20 mM HEPES at pH 7.5, 0.5%) FBS, and 50 μg/mL Gentamicin. The cells are incubated overnight. On day three, pervanadate solution is made ten minutes before cell lysis; pervanadate is prepared by mixing 100 μL of sodium orthovanadate (100 mM) and 3.4 μL of hydrogen peroxide (producing 100X stock pervanadate solution). The lysis buffer is then prepared: 50 mM HEPES at pH 7.5, 150 mM sodium chloride, 10% glycerol, 1% TRITON-X100™, 1 mM EDTA, 1 mM pervanadate, and BM protease inhibitors. The cells are stimulated by adding 10 μL of the LP polypeptide solution to the cells, and incubating for ten minutes. Next, the medium is aspirated, and 75 μL lysis buffer are added to each well. The cells are lysed at 4 degrees C for fifteen minutes, then 25 μL of 4X loading buffer are added to the cell lysates. The resultant solution is mixed then heated to 95 degrees C.
Detection of tyrosine phosphorylation is accomplished by Western immunoblotting. Twenty microliters of each cell sample are loaded onto SDS-PAGE eight to sixteen percent amino acid-ready gels from Bio-Rad, and the gels are run. The proteins are electrotransferred in transfer buffer (25 mM Tris base at pH 8.3, 0.2 M glycine, 20% methanol) from the gel to a nitrocellulose membrane using 250 mA per gel over a one hour period. The membrane is incubated for one hour at ambient conditions in blocking buffer consisting of TBST (20 mM Tris hydrochloride at pH 7.5, 150 mM sodium chloride, 0.1% TWEEN®-20) with 1% BSA.
Next, the antibodies are added to the membrane. The membrane is incubated overnight at 4 degrees C with gentle rocking in primary antibody solution consisting of the antibody, TBST, and 1% BSA. The next day, the membrane is washed three times, five minutes per wash, with TBST. The membrane is then incubated in the secondary antibody solution consisting of the antibody, TBST, and 1 % BSA for one hour at ambient conditions with gentle rocking. After the incubation, the membrane is washed four times with TBST, ten minutes per wash.
Detection is accomplished by incubating the membrane with 10 to 30 mL of SuperSignal Solution for one minute at ambient conditions. After one minute, excess developing solution is removed, and the membrane is wrapped in plastic wrap. The membrane is exposed to X-ray film for twenty second, one minute, and two minute exposures (or longer if needed). The number and intensity of immunostained protein bands are compared to bands for the negative control-stimulated cells (basal level of phosphorylation) by visual comparison. Example 6 Cell Stimulation with Detection Utilizing Reporters Protein-induced cell responses are measured using reporters. The SK-N-MC cell line (neuroblastoma; ATCC HTB-10) / NFKB reporter combination is used. For the reporter used, positive controls are designed in the form of agonist cocktails. These cocktails include approximate maximal stimulatory doses of several ligands known to stimulate the regulated signal pathway. For the NFKB reporter, the NFKB / PkC pathway is stimulated by an agonist cocktail containing LPS and TNF-alpha as positive controls. Cell lines and reporters with no exogenous stimulus added are used as negative controls.
At time zero, the cells are transiently transfected with the reporter plasmids in tissue culture flasks using a standard optimized protocol for all cell lines (see Example 1). After 24 hours, the cells are trypsinized and seeded into 96-well poly-D-lysine coated assay plates at a rate of 20,000 cells per well in growth medium. After four to five hours, the medium is replaced with serum-free growth medium. At that time, stimulants for those reporters which required a 24-hour stimulation period are added. After 48 hours, stimulants for the reporters which required a five-hour stimulation period are added. Five hours later, all conditions are lysed using a lysis/luciferin cocktail, and the fluorescence of the samples is determined using a Micro Beta reader. Each assay plate is plated to contain four positive control wells, sixteen negative control wells, and sixty- four test sample wells (two replicates of thirty-two test samples). The threshold value for a positive "hit" is a fluorescence signal equal to the mean plus two standard deviations of the negative control wells. Any test sample that, in both replicates, generates a signal above that threshold is defined as a "hit."
Example 7 Cell Proliferation and Cytotoxicity Determination Utilizing Fluorescence Detection This assay is designed to monitor gross changes in the number of cells remaining in culture after exposure to LP polypeptides for a period of three days. The following cells are used in this assay:
U373MG (astrocytoma cell line, ATCC HTB-22) Tl 165 (plastocytoma cell line) ECV304 endothelial cell line)
Prior to assay, cells are incubated in an appropriate assay medium to produce a sub-optimal growth rate, e.g., a 1 :10 or 1 :20 dilution of normal culture medium. Cells are grown in T-l 50 flasks, then harvested by trypsin digestion and replated at 40 to 50% confluence into poly-D-lysine-treated 96-well plates. Cells are only plated into the inner thirty-two wells to prevent edge artifacts due to medium evaporation; the outer wells are filled with buffer alone. Following incubation overnight to stabilize cell recovery, LP polypeptides are added to the appropriate wells. Each polypeptide is assayed in triplicate at two different concentrations, IX and 0.1X dilution in assay medium. Two controls are also included on each assay plate: assay medium and normal growth medium.
After approximately 72 hours of exposure, the plates are processed to determine the number of viable cells. Plates are spun to increase the attachment of cells to the plate. The medium is then discarded, and 50 μL of detection buffer is added to each well. The detection buffer consisted on MEM medium containing no phenol red (Gibco) with calcein AM (Molecular Probes) and PLURONIC® F-127 (Molecular Probes), each at a 1 :2000 dilution. After incubating the plates in the dark at room temperature for thirty minutes, the fluorescence intensity of each well is measured using a Cytofluor 4000-plate reader (PerSeptive Biosystems). For a given cell type, the larger the fluorescence intensity, the greater the number of cells in the well. To determine the effects on cell growth from each plate, the intensity of each well containing cells stimulated with an LP polypeptide is subtracted from the intensity of the wells containing assay medium only (controls). Thus, a positive number indicated stimulation of cell growth; a negative number indicated a reduction in growth. Additionally, confidence limits at 95 and 90% are calculated from the mean results. Results lying outside the 95% confidence limit are scored as "definite hits." Results lying between the 95 and 90% confidence limits are scored as "maybes." The distinction between definite hits and maybes varied due to intraplate variability; thus, subjective scoring is used as a final determination for "hits."

Claims

WE CLAIM:
1. Isolated nucleic acid comprising DNA having at least 95% sequence identity to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of: (a) a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence as shown in SEQ ID
NO: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9;
(b) a polynucleotide encoding a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10;
(c) a polynucleotide encoding the mature form of a polypeptide having the amino acid sequence as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10;
(d) a polynucleotide fragment of a polynucleotide as in (a), (b), or (c); and
(e) a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence which is complementary to the nucleotide sequence of a polynucleotide as in (a), (b), (c), or (d).
2. An isolated nucleic acid molecule encoding a polypeptide comprising DNA that hybridizes to the complement of the nucleic acid sequence that encodes LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, LP401, or any fragment or variant thereof.
3. The isolated nucleic acid molecule of claim 2, wherein hybridization occurs under stringent hybridization and wash conditions.
4. A vector comprising the nucleic acid molecule of any of Claims 1 to 3.
5. The vector of Claim 4, wherein said nucleic acid molecule is operably linked to control sequences recognized by a host cell transformed with the vector.
6. A host cell comprising the vector of Claim 5.
7. A process for producing an LP polypeptide comprising culturing the host cell of Claim 6 under conditions suitable for expression of said LP polypeptide and recovering said
LP polypeptide from the cell culture.
8. An isolated polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence comprising about 95% sequence identity to a sequence of amino acid residues comprising LP359, LP364, LP381, LP400, or LP401 as shown in SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10, respectively.
9. An isolated polypeptide comprising a sequence of amino acid residues selected from the group consisting of:
(a) SEQ ID NO:2, 4, 6, 8, or 10;
(b) fragments of (a) sufficient to provide a binding site for an LP polypeptide antibody; and (c) variants of (a) or (b).
10. An isolated polypeptide produced by the method of Claim 7.
1 1. A chimeric molecule comprising an LP polypeptide fused to a heterologous amino acid sequence.
12. The chimeric molecule of Claim 11 , wherein said heterologous amino acid sequence is an epitope tag sequence.
13. The chimeric molecule of Claim 12, wherein said heterologous amino acid sequence is an Fc region of an immunoglobulin.
14. An antibody which specifically binds to an LP polypeptide.
15. The antibody of Claim 14, where said antibody is a monoclonal antibody.
16. The antibody of Claim 15, wherein said antibody is selected from the group consisting of a humanized antibody and a human antibody.
17. A composition comprising a therapeutically effective amount of an active agent selected from the group consisting of:
(a) an LP polypeptide;
(b) an agonist to an LP polypeptide;
(c) an antagonist to an LP polypeptide;
(d) an LP polypeptide antibody;
(e) an anti-LP polypeptide-encoding mRNA specific ribozyme; and
(f) a polynucleotide as in Claim 1 , in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
18. A method of treating a mammal suffering from a disease, condition, or disorder associated with aberrant levels of an LP-polypeptide comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of an LP polypeptide or LP polypeptide agonist.
19. A method of diagnosing a disease, condition, or disorder associated with aberrant levels of an LP polypeptide by: (1) culturing test cells or tissues expressing LP polypeptide; (2) administering a compound which can inhibit LP polypeptide modulated signaling; and (3) measuring the LP polypeptide-mediated phenotypic effects in the test cells or tissues.
20. An article of manufacture comprising a container, label and therapeutically effective amount of the composition of Claim 17.
21. Use of an LP polypeptide in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disease, condition, or disorder associated with aberrant levels of an LP polypeptide.
PCT/US2003/006714 2002-03-28 2003-03-19 Novel secreted proteins and their uses WO2003083048A2 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP03745524A EP1492558A4 (en) 2002-03-28 2003-03-19 Novel secreted proteins and their uses
AU2003216525A AU2003216525A1 (en) 2002-03-28 2003-03-19 Novel secreted proteins and their uses

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US36868802P 2002-03-28 2002-03-28
US60/368,688 2002-03-28

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003083048A2 true WO2003083048A2 (en) 2003-10-09
WO2003083048A3 WO2003083048A3 (en) 2004-04-01

Family

ID=28675529

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2003/006714 WO2003083048A2 (en) 2002-03-28 2003-03-19 Novel secreted proteins and their uses

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1492558A4 (en)
AU (1) AU2003216525A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003083048A2 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20020111302A1 (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-08-15 Y. Tom Tang Novel nucleic acids and polypeptides
US20030149238A1 (en) * 2000-02-14 2003-08-07 Pankaj Agarwal Novel compounds

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003501028A (en) * 1999-05-27 2003-01-14 ザイモジェネティクス,インコーポレイティド Adipocyte complement-related protein homolog zacrp7
AU2002360460A1 (en) * 2001-12-03 2003-06-17 Nuvelo, Inc. Methods and materials relating to novel polypeptides and polynucleotides

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030149238A1 (en) * 2000-02-14 2003-08-07 Pankaj Agarwal Novel compounds
US20020111302A1 (en) * 2000-11-30 2002-08-15 Y. Tom Tang Novel nucleic acids and polypeptides

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DATABASE GENBANK [Online] 06 March 1999 STONE N.E. ET AL.: 'Homo sapiens chromosome 4 clone C0478G20 map 4 q16', XP002972791 Retrieved from NCBI Database accession no. (AC007016) *
DATABASE GENBANK [Online] 20 December 2000 PIDDINGTON C.S. ET AL.: 'Homo sapiens complement-c1q tumor necrosis factor-related protein', XP002972789 Retrieved from NCBI Database accession no. (AF329839) *
See also references of EP1492558A2 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1492558A2 (en) 2005-01-05
AU2003216525A8 (en) 2003-10-13
AU2003216525A1 (en) 2003-10-13
EP1492558A4 (en) 2006-07-19
WO2003083048A3 (en) 2004-04-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20060147945A1 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
EP1309614A2 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
US20040038242A1 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
US7749500B2 (en) Antibodies to IL-17 polypeptides and therapeutic uses thereof
US20030215913A1 (en) Nucleic acids, vectors, host cells, polypeptides, and uses thereof
US20070160594A1 (en) Method of Diagnosing and Treating Cartilaginous Disorders
JP2001510035A (en) Interleukin-20
US20040142333A1 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
US20050048483A1 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
WO2002048361A2 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
EP1313765A2 (en) Secreted proteins and methods of using same
US20060142558A1 (en) Novel proteins and their uses
EP1492558A2 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
US20030212258A1 (en) Novel secreted proteins and methods of using same
EP1500663A1 (en) Secreted proteins and their uses
US20040215007A1 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
EP1529843A2 (en) Novel secreted proteins and their uses
US20030216547A1 (en) Cerebellin homologous polypeptides and therapeutic uses thereof
WO2004044126A2 (en) Novel proteins and their uses
EP1290026A2 (en) Human sez6 nucleic acids and polypeptides
WO2005092921A2 (en) Placental growth factor splice variants and their uses
EP1865061A2 (en) IL-17 homologous polypeptides and therapeutic uses thereof
WO2002008283A2 (en) Lp120 polypeptides and therapeutic uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003745524

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2003745524

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2003745524

Country of ref document: EP